Commentary on Thucydides Book 1 E.C. Marchant Perseus Project, Tufts University Gregory Crane Prepared under the supervision of Lisa Cerrato Anne Mahoney Jeffrey Rydberg-Cox David Smith National Endowment for the Humanities Trustees of Tufts University Medford, MA Perseus Project Perseus 3.0 viaf76387703.viaf001a.perseus-eng1 Available under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License Thucydides Book I Thucydides Edgar Carew Marchant 1905 London Macmillan and Company, Ltd. Internet Archive

This pointer extracts book and chapter and section and note.

This pointer extracts book and chapter and section.

This pointer extracts book and chapter.

This pointer extracts book.

English Greek Latin

1. Θουκυδίδης κτλ. loc —a formal method of opening, after the manner of the gnomic poets, not due, as Bloomfield imagined, to 'the modesty of our author.' Cf. Herod.init.; Intr. p. xv.

ξυνέγραψε —a characteristic word of Thuc., who is known to the ancient critics as ὁ συγγραφεύς, much as Homer is ὁ ποιητής. It denotes the bringing together in one work of many occurrences— composing in its etymological sense. (How some find a reference to the hunting up of materials is not clear.)

3. ὡς ἐπολέμησαν —namely, how, i.e. showing how they waged war. Of course different from ὃν ἐπολέμησαν, which would be absurdly tautological. The aorist is called complexive.

4. ἀρξάμενος ( τοῦ ξυγγράψαι ) κτλ. —we are to understand that as soon as the war broke out Thuc. began to put down what occurred, and kept a sort of diary of the war.

εὐθὺς καθισταμένου —supply τοῦ πολέμου.

5. ἐλπίσας — expecting. On the relation of the participles here see Intr. p. xli. This first sentence is very characteristic of Thuc., in whose periods form is constantly subordinated to sense. O. Muller well says that Thuc. has two favourite forms of period, (a) the main predication, followed by clauses giving the circumstances and reasons, which may in turn be explained in similar clauses; and (b) the reasons, circumstances in participial and other clauses followed by the resulting fact or opinion, as in c. 2. 2 .

ἀξιολογώτατον τῶν π .—the illogical form of comparison, as in c. 10. 3, cf. ‘fairest of her daughters Eve’: Tac. Ag. 34 ceterorum fugacissimi. It is frequent in Greek.

6 τεκμαιρόμενος —inferring this, adding the grounds of the ἐλπίς These grounds are (1) ὅτι ἀκμάζοντες ..., (2) ὁρῶν ... Thus the clause with ὅτι is co-ordinate with a partic. of cause; cf. Xen. Symp. 8. 11 τεκμαίρομαι τῇ καλοκἀγαθίᾳ καὶ ὅτι σε ὁρῶ .

7. ἀκμάζοντές ... παρασκευῇ —at the height of their military power. That ᾖσαν, not ἦσαν, is the true reading there cannot be a doubt; for ἰέναι ἐς in this pregnant use see L. & S.

8. τὸ ἄλλο Ἑλληνικόν —including the Greeks outside Greece proper. Cf. τὸ ληστικόν , τὸ βαρβαρικόν, τὸ ξενικόν, and many others.

10. καὶ διανοούμενον —sc. ξυνίστασθαι, the ellipse of an infin. with διανοεὶσθαι being common, as in 124. 3. The καί serves to bring διανοούμενον into connexion with ξυνιστάμενον; we should put ‘actually’ with τὸ μὲν εὐθύς. The Sicilian Greeks are a good example.

γάρ loc —as ‘the movement’ meant by κίνησις must be (1) the war itself, and (2) the unrest that preceded it, γάρ cannot introduce the reason of the expectation that the war would be important, but must be epexegetic.

12. μέρει τινί —a considerable part, as, for example, Thrace and Macedon. Supply ἐγένετο, affected.

ὡς δὲ εἰπεῖν —qualifying πλεῖστον. Note that ὡς (ἔπος) εἰπεῖν never apologises for a metaphor, but always limits a sweeping or universal statement. Hence (it extended, ἐγένετο), one might almost say, over the greatest part of mankind; i.e. it affected perhaps a greater part of mankind than had been affected by any previous commotion. Of course the possible exception is the Persian wars.

(Whatever be the exact construction of μεγίστη δὴ ... ἀνθρώπων—and the words are variously interpreted—Thuc. over-estimates the importance of the war. If we supply μεγίστη δὴ ἐγένετο to μέρει τινί and ἐπὶ πλεῖστον, the exaggeration is extreme. ἐπὶ πλεῖστον is taken by Classen and others to mean the greatest part of the (known) world; but this involves a very great exaggeration of a fact ascertainable; and it is unlikely that Thuc. would make such a sweeping statement. It looks also as if πλεῖστον, more than before, were meant to be parallel to μεγίστη, greater than before. The text has no appearance of being corrupt or interpolated.)

13. τὰ πρὸ αὐτῶν —the events that preceded this disturbance ( κίνησις). The neut. αὐτά is frequently used by Thuc. with reference to the details of the subject he is dealing with.

(This phrase cannot refer to events that immediately preceded the war; for (a) διὰ χρόνου πλῆθος would then be absurd, (b) Thuc. himself gives an account of the fifty years preceding the war as a period well known, (c) the Persian wars could not be ineluded in οὐ μεγάλα νομίζω γενέσθαι κατὰ τοὺς πολέμους (cf. c. 18. 2). Thuc. must be thinking of the period of the Trojan war and of that between the Trojan war and the Persian war, i.e. to the end of the Tyrants. But the words are very inexact; cf. Intr. p. xx).

14. τὰ ἔτι παλαίτερα —events preceding the Trojan war.

15. ἀδύνατα —Thuc. frequently uses the neut. plur. of the verbal or of an adj. for the sing. where the subject is an infin. or a sentence. The use is mainly poetical.

τεκμηρίων —these ‘evidences’ are detailed in cc. 2-17: (1) migrations were frequent; (2) there was no common name; (3) weakness by sea; (4) the expeditions by land were on a small scale and were confined to border-fighting; (5) the tyrants hampered Greece proper, and Persia hampered Ionia.

1. ὧν belongs to πιστεῦσαι, and is probably attracted from ἅ. Chambry quotes Soph. OT 646 πίστευσον, Οἰδίπους, τάδε, for the accus. with πιστεύω.

ἐπὶ μακρότατον σκοποῦντι —by carrying my inquiry to the farthest hunt (of the past). ἐπὶ μακρότατον of time also in Hdt. 1.171, in a similar connexion.

5. οἰκουμένη — this and the following participles are imperfect.

6. οὖσαι —sc. φαίνονται.

τὰ πρότερα —the adverbial accus., in plur, is common in Thuc., but is seldom found in other prose anthors.

8. βιαζόμενοι —the pres. and imperf. of this verb in a passive sense are far less common in other prose authors than in Thuc.

ὑπό τινων αἰεὶ πλειόνων —what is noticeable here is that αἰεί ('from time to time') occurs with τινων, and not with τῶν, which—as the older critics note—is the usual form of expression.

9. τῆς γὰρ ἐμπορίας κτλ —see note on p. 1 l. 6. The causes to which the readiness to migrate are ascribed are (1) absence of commerce and intercommunication: τῆς γὰρ ... θαλάσσης: (2) low state of agriculture and absence of capital sunk in the land: νεμόμενοί τε ... φυτεύοντες: (3) absence of demand for anything beyond the necessaries of life, which could be procured anywhere: τῆς τε ... ἐπικρατεῖν.

ἐπιμειγνύντες —the mid. is used in the same sense, e.g. in c. 146. At a period when the tribes of Greece regarded one another as enemies, it was impossible that ἐπιμιξία should exist, ἐπιμιξία being based upon treaties. In later times ἐπιμιξία terminated as soon as a state of war existed.

10. διά —the sea as the medium of intercourse.

11. νεμόμενοι —the word is used of enjoyment of profits derived, which may be combined with occupation. The following participles—ἔχοντες, φυτεύοντες—are circumstances explanatory of the degree of ‘enjoyment’ attained. (νέμεσθαι ὡς τὸ πολὺ τὸ λαμβάνειν πρόσοδον παρὰ Θουκυδίδῃ, Photius.)

τὰ αὑτῶν —what they had acquired by adverse possession.

12. ὅσον —i.e. τοσοῦτον, ὅσον, where ὅσον = ὥστε, and is assimilated to the adverbial accus. τοσοῦτον .

ἀποζῆν —this word occurs nowhere else in Attic, but is used by late writers (Lucian, Aelian, etc.), some at least of whom think it means to live poorly, inferring the sense implied in this passage.

περιουσίαν κτλ .—had they accumulated stores for the purpose of barter, and had they planted trees, it would have been less easy to migrate.

13. ἄδηλον ὄν —accus. abs.

14. ἐπελθὼν καὶ ἀτειχίστων ἅμα ὄ .—(1) alternative explanations, seldom desirable, are here clearly called for; (2) taking ἀτειχίστων ὄντων first: the sense is, ‘as they were without walls.’ The simplest way is to suppose this masc. and dependent on ἀφαιρήσεται. This involves making καὶ ... άμα almost equivalent to ἄλλως τε καί : καί, we are told, does not = ‘and,’ but καὶ ... ἄμα = ‘particularly,’ as in 102. 3 and elsewhere. But (3) this makes it impossible to explain why τις ... ἅλλος, which go together, are separated, because ἐπελθὼν ... ὄντων is not then one expression. (4) This objection is diminished if καὶ ... ὄντων is taken as a parenthetical gen. abs., either (a) masc., with αὐτῶν supplied, or (b) neut., with subj. supplied from context, like πλωιμωτέρων ὄντων c. 7. (5) The objection disappears if καί = ‘and,’ ἐπελθὼν καὶ ἀ. ἅμα ὄντων giving the two circumstances leading to loss—ἀφαιρήσεται. Though one circumstance is modal— ἐπελθών—the other causal, it is like Thuc. to connect them by καί .

15. ἀναγκαίου —of what will just suffice, as in necessarius cibus. ἀναγκαῖος is frequently fem, in Plato. βίαιος and βέβαιος always have two terminations in Thuc.

16. πανταχοῦ — anywhere. The sense any frequently belongs to πᾶς and words front it.

17. δῑ αὐτό — accordingly; Thuc, often uses αὐτὅ‐ά) in reference to a previous statement

μεγέθει —of the number of inhabitants, as in c. 10.

18. παρασκευῇ —naval and military resources, as distinct from κατασκευή, the external adornment of a city.

19. ἡ ἀρίστη —cf. τῆς γῆς οὐ πολλὴν ἔτεμον 6.7. The attraction is most common with πολύς, but is fairly frequent with other adjectives.

20. νῦν ... καλουμένη belongs to both nouns. In early times the districts had no general name.

22. Ἀρκαδίας —the exemption was due to the isolated character of Arcadia, the consequence of its mountams. ἄρκτος , Bear-land; cf. ἄρκειος. The Arcadrans were unaffected by the Dorian migration They prided themselves on being autochthones (cf. Xen. Hell. 7.1. 23), and on their primeval antiquity (cf. L & S. under προσέληνος ).

κράτιστα — best, the regular meaning of κράτιστος when applied to land.

23. ἀρετήν — fertility. When Greece was in the village stage, (1) the inhabitants of some districts grew (comparatively) wealthy, and as a consequence there were disputes between the ‘haves’ and ‘have-nots’; (2) these fertile districts excited the cupidity of other clans.

25. μᾶλλον —more than communities whose land was not so fertile.

26. γοῦν —at any rate the immunity of Attica was due to its barrenness; it is therefore likely that the troubles of other districts were due to their fertility.

τοῦ ἐπὶ πλεῖστον , ‘the remotest time.’ ἐπὶ πλεῖστον, adverbial (‘extending farthest back’), has the art. like τὸ πρίν, etc.

τὸ λεπτόγεων —(1) the constant use of neut. adj. or partic. for a subst. is a feature of Thuc.'s style; (2) the soil of Attica is in general stony and dry. The Attic Plain is watered by the Ilissus and Cephisus, but in summer the former is almost dry and the latter “μειοῦται τελέως”: the land yields a return only to diligent cultivation. Of course in these early times the land was not setentifically dealt with; and it is noteworthy, as bearing on Thuc.'s point, that it looks more barren than it is.

28. παράδειγμα —the meaning of this term in Greek rhetoric is not merely ‘example,’ but ‘an example used to support an argument.’

τόδε —referring to the sentence that follows, ἐκ γάρ κτλ.

τοῦ λόγου —explained by διά, etc.

29. διὰ τὰς μετοικίας κτλ .—that it was owing to the habit of settling elsewhere (to which I have referred) that Greece in other respects (besides population and security) had not advanced so fast (as Attica). μετοικίας is used exactly as in Aesch. Eum. 1019, where the Furies refer to their μετοικία to and in Athens. 1. That ἐκ γάρ κτλ. explains τόδε is proved by the usage of Thuc. 2. διὰ ... αὐξηθῆναι is beset with difficulties. With the MS. reading τὰς μετοικίας ἐς τὰ ἄλλα three explanatious have been proposed: (a) ‘Attica did not grow in other respects so fast as in population.’ But this does not fall in with the general line of the argument. (b) ‘ Attica through the presence of μέτοικοι advanced much more (μὴ ὀμοίως) in other respects.’ But neither is this the argument, nor is there any proof that μὴ ὁμοίως can in such a connexion as this mean much more. (c) With regard to the rendering given above, it is denied that Greece can be the subject of αὐξηθῆναι. But, if we examine c. 2 as a whole, this does not appear impossible. The chapter deals with the early condition of Greece in general—ἡ νῦν Ἑλλάς καλουυένη—the smallness of the communities (οὔτε μεγέθει πόλεων ἴσχυον) and their weakness. To these conditions the very fertility of the soil contributed. Attica, which was barren, was an exception in both respects. It did not lose inhabitants by στάσις: it did not excite the cupidity of strangers. On the other hand, strangers settled in Attica because it offered security; and thus the population of Attica was still further increased, and it was able to colonise. These last facts lend further support to my general argument (ὁ λόγος), viz. that the weakness of the early Greeks in all respects is largely accounted for by the shifting nature of the population. ἡ Ἑλλάς is in the writer's mind throughout. ἐς τὰ ἄλλα is explained by many ‘with reference to its other parts’; but it more naturally means in other respects than those points to which I have specifically referied. A striking example of this (ex contrario) is the colonising energy of Attica, the consequence of freedom from migration. Some take ὲς τὰ ἄλλα with μετοικίας—migrations to other parts; but τά is then wrong. Ullrich's emendation, according to which τὰ ἄλλα, other parts of Greece, is subject of αὐξηθῆναι—see crit. 11.—is generally accepted; but it is not absolutely necessary.

2. πολέμῳ —referring to ὑπὸ ἀλλοφύλων ἐπεβουλεύοντο .

3. οἱ δυνατώτατοι —limiting apposition to οἱ ἐκπίπτοντες. This kind of apposition is common in Thuc.—The most conspicuous instance is that of the Alcmaeonidae from Pylus.

ὡς βέβαιον ὄν —taken as (1) accus. abs., with ἀναχωρεῖν παρ’ Ἀθηναίους implied; (2) by Classen as governed by παρά, in a loose apposition to Ἀθηναίους. The second, though loose in grammar, gives a better sense.

4. πολῖται γιγνόμενοι —the imperf. partic, points to the many instances in which citizenship was bestowed. Of course this system of conferring civic rights belongs to a time when only the Eupatrids had any political power. They admitted new families freely. In later days, on the contrary, when Athens had attained power and the demos ruled, the Ecclesia was very jealous of the citizenship. Yet this welcome of political exiles remained an houourable tradition, as we see from the plays of Euripides

εὐθὺς ἀπὸ παλαιοῦ with ἐποίησαν, but εὐθύς belongs to ἀπὸ π., being equivalent to ἀρξάμενοι εὐθύς: cf. c. 146 and 142. 7 .

7. ἐξέπεμψαν —sc. οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι. The colonising activity of Attica is supposed to have begun in the eleventh cent. B.C.

9. δηλοῖ —second proof of weakness, viz. lack of communication.

τῶν παλαιῶν — neut., like τὰ πρὸ αὐτῶν καὶ τὰ ἔτι παλαίτερα in c. 2. Here τὰ παλαιά is explained to mean τὰ πρὸ τῶν τρωικῶν The lit. trans, is insignificance in our early history.

11. πρότερον —this merely repeats the sense of πρό, as in οὐ πρότερον ... πρίν κτλ .

12. δοκεῖ δέ μοι —(1) at first parenthetical, afterwards (2) δοκεῖ ἡ ἐπίκλησις οὐδὲ εἶναι, (3) δοκεῖ ἄλλα (nom.) ... παρέχεσθαι, (4) δοκεῖ Ἔλληνας καλεῖσθαι, (5) ? parenthetical, before ἐδύνατο. When a verb can take more than one construction, Thuc. sometimes combines alternative constructions in the same sentence without repeating the verb.

13. τὰ πρὸ Ἕλληνος —adv. accus., as τὰ πρότερα c. 2, τὰ ἐν τῇ εἰρήνῃ 54.3. Hellen was son of Deucalion and Pyrrha; and Hellenes from Phthiotis accompanied Achilles to Troy. How the name came to be be extended to all the Greeks is unknown.

14. καὶ πάνυ —emphasised by being separated from εἶναι. Cf. Xen. Anab. 1.5.8 καὶ μάλα κατὰ πρανοῦς γηλόφου, Dem. 5. 15 καὶ πάνυ φησί τις αὐτοὺς ἀναισθήτους εἶναι, and so with οὐ (μἤ πάνυ not unfrequently. We should rather expect οὐ πάνυ μοι δοκεῖ οὐδ’ εἶναι.

εἶναι —this and the infins, that follow are imperfect.

15. κατὰ ἔθνη —distributive. This forms the subject to παρέχεσθαι = ‘various tribes,’ ἄλλα τε καὶ τὸ π., among others the Pelasgian tribe, being in apposition to κ. ἔθνη. Adverbial phrases are frequent in Thuc. as equivalent of a case of a subst.: as in 6.39 ταῦτα καὶ κατὰ μέρη καὶ ξύμπαντα.

16. τὸ Πελασγικόν —a tribe of aborigines, whom Homer speaks of as dwelling in Asia Minor and Crete as well as in Greece. For the facts and theories about them see Abbott. Hist. Greece i. p. 27 fol. “When the Pelasgi became established [in literature] as an ancient tribe, those nations which laid claim to great antiquity, as the Athenians and Arcadians, became Pelasgians” (This is enough to know.)

ἐπὶ πλεῖστον —this belongs to τὸ Πελασγικόν, meaning that the name of the P. was more widely extended than that of any other tribe.

17. παρέχεσθαι —sc. to the country.

τῶν παίδων —Aeolus, Dorus, and Xuthus.

18. ἰσχυσάντων —ingressive aor., ‘having become mighty.’

19. ἐπαγομένων —sc. τινῶν .

ἐπ’ ὠφελίᾳ —to aid them. ὠφελία often = βοήθεια; cf. 1.73.2 ἐπ’ ὠφελίᾳ.

20. καθ’ ἑκάστους —subject of καλεῖσθαι: the several tribes more and more (ἤδη μᾶλλον) began to be called Hellenes in consequence of their intercourse (with the Hellenes).

21. πολλοῦ χρόνου —time within which (partitive), less commonly found in positive sentences.

22. ἐδύνατο —sc. τὸ καλεῖσθαι Ἕλληνας. Shil. quotes Eur. Phoen. 12-13 καλοῦσι δ’ Ἰοκάστην με, τοῦτο γὰρ πατὴρ ἔθετο. The ἐδύνατο is probably spurious, because, though the constrn. of δοκεῖ shifts (see on 1. 12), the two clauses καθ’ ἑκάστους μὲν ... οὐ μέντοι should have the same form, just as τὰ μὲν . κατὰ ἔθνη δέ have. Even if the constrn. were again changed here, we should probably have ἐξενίκησε.

25. ὠνόμασεν —sc. Ἕλληνας.

οὐδ’ ἄλλους —i.e. Hellas in Homer is Phthiotis, B 684. It has been pointed out that in α 344, δ 726 , 816, ο 80 Ἑλλάς with Ἄργος denotes Greece in general. The lines are perhaps spurious.

27. τὰ ἔπη —the poems.

28. ἀνακαλεῖ —distinguishes them as. ἀνακαλῶ is call by a distinctive, official name.

οὐ μὴν οὐδέ —nor even; οὐ μὴν ἀλλά = ‘not but what.’

1. βαρβάρους εἴρηκε —mentioned barbarians, because not yet had the Hellenes either been distinguished under one name in opposition (to them). There is a difficulty as to the construction of ἀντίπαλον. (1) Eustathius, followed by Stahl and Steup, made it agree with ὄνομα, despite the order; and the adj. is occasionally separated by a prep. from its subst.; (2) Classen thought it an adverb like τοὐναντίον: the absence of the article is one reason against this; (3) Böhme made it internal accus. to ἀποκεκρίσθαι, to have undergone an opposing separation, and Krüger favours this; (4) Mr. Forbes says it is in apposition to Ἕλληνας, which means the word Greeks. But should we not even so require ἀντιπάλους or Ἕλληνες ?

The edd. note that Thuc. neglects the epithet βαρβαρόφωνοι, of the Carians, in Hom. Il. 2.867. But this simply means speaking an unknown tongue, and the statement of Thuc. is substantially correct. The Greeks could not be conscious that they were a separate people before they were conscious that they were one people.

3. δ’ οὖν —resuming after the digression of which 3.3 consists.

οἱ ... ὡς ἕκαστοι ... κληθέντες —the main subject is οἱ Ἕλληνες κληθέντες, those who came to be called H. This is divided into (a) ὡς ἕκαστοι κατὰ πόλεις τε ὅσοι ἀλλήλων ξυνίεσαν , referring to καθ’ ἑκάστους μὲν ἤδη ... Ἕλληνας 3.2; (b) καὶ ξύμπαντες ὕστερον, referring to οὐ μέντοι ... ἅπασιν ἐκνικῆσαι. In (a) τε = both is misplaced, the irregularity being explained by the fact that κατὰ ... ξυνιέσαν is added to ὡς ἕκαστοι as an afterthought. Possibly, however, τε = and, but it is hard to see any distinction between ὡς ἕκαστοι and κατὰ π. The sentence is overloaded, since ὕστερον, i e. long after the Trojan War (cf. 3.3), is combined with a statement of what happened πρὸ τῶν Τρωικῶν. Observe also that this apparent recapitulation (οἱ δ’ οὖν κτλ.) does not agree entirely with the statements made in 3.2, where nothing is said about a common language. Thuc., as others have noticed, does not seem to have a clear view of the matter.

8. The MS. ξυνῆλθον will not do: ἐξέρχομαι, ἔξειμι with accus, are not rare in Attic prose in a military sense; but ἔρχομαι , εἶμι are not used so.

9. Μίνως γάρ —from this point to c. 8 Thuc. deals with the gradual growth of maritime enterprise, and the ‘barbarian character of the early Greeks.’ For Minos see Abbott, Hist. Greece i. p. 122.

παλαίτατος —was the first to. This does not belong to τῶν Κυκλάδων ... ἐγένετο, and perhaps not to τῆς νῦν ... ἐκράτησε.

10. τῆς ... θαλάσσης —this may depend on ἐπὶ πλεῖστον, or on ἐκράτησε.

12. ἦρξε —became ruler.

13. πρῶτος —later the Athenians colonised the islands, and after that an Athenian would be honoured as οἰκιστής. See c. 12. 4.

15. ἐγκαταστήσας —this partic. is of course not antecedent in time to the main verb ἐγένετο. It is aor. merely because it is the explanation how ἐγένετο οἰκιστής, the partic. being equivalent to καί + aor. ind. (This use of the aor. partic. in Thuc. disposes of the passages discussed by Mr. Forbes, Thuc. i. p. 142.)

ὡς εἰκός —as was natural (in one who ruled the sea).

16. καθῄρει —used of destroying, putting an end to a power, as in c. 16. 1 .

17. τοῦ ... ἰέναι —purpose, generally with μή. Tac. imitates this in Ann. 2.59 Aegyptum proficiscitur cognoscendae antiquitatis, etc.

21. ἐπ) — to, not against.

23. οὐ τῶν ἀδυνατωτάτων = τῶν δυνατωτάτων.

κέρδους ἕνεκα —a frequent phrase. Notice the place of ἕνεκα, which is usual when it applies to two nouns, as e.g. Antiphon 6, 7 διαβολῆς ἕνεκα καὶ ἀπάτης, Lys. 32. 10 καὶ τῆς ἀδελφῆς ἕνεκα καὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν. But the rule is not absolute.

24. τοῖς ἀσθενέσι τροφῆς —cf. Dem. 1.22 τὰ τῆς τροφῆς τοῖς ξένοις. ἀσθενεῖς = ‘weak.’

25. πόλεσιν ἀτειχίστοις —i.e. village communities. We cannot help thinking of the great aphorism in 7.77. 7 ἄνδρες γὰρ πολις καὶ οὐ τείχη.

27. βίου — livelihood. ἐποιοῦντο = ‘would get,’ a sense more familiar in the corresponding passive forms, ὁ βίος ἐγίγνετο αὐτοῖς.

ἐποιοῦντο —see L. & S. A. II. 2.

ἔχοντος —synonymous with φέροντος . 2.37.3 νόμων ὅσοι αἰσχύνην φέρουσι, 2.41.3 τῷ πολεμίῳ ἀγανάκτησιν ἔχει.

2. δηλοῦσι —i.e. show the truth of the preceding statements: there is even in the present day evidence for what I have said.

τῶν ἠπειρωτῶν τινες —i.e. those dwelling in the coast towns of the mainland.

3. καλῶς — cleverly, as often in καλῶς λέγειν .

τοῦτο δρᾶν —a regular expression for referring to a previous verb.

4. οἱ παλαιοί —sc. δηλοῦσι .

τὰς πύστεις ... ἐρωτῶντες —lit. everywhere agreeing in putting the stock question to strangers who come by sea, ‘are you pirates?’ thus showing that the persons addressed were not accustomed to disown the occupation, and that those who made it their bussiness to know did not censure it. Of ‘the old poets’ Homer is one (Od. 3.71 and 9.252); and there is the Hymn to Apollo l. 452; but of course Thucydides knew other passages. The wording of the sentence has been questioned; but Thuc. seems to have had in mind ἡ πύστις τῶν καταπλεόντων ἐστὶν εἰ λῃσταί εἰσιν. The poets are said to ask the question: for the characters are the mouthpiece of the poet.

6. οὔτε ... τε frequently correspond, as in Lat. neque ... et

πυνθάνονται ... ἐπιμελὲς εἴη —the forms of the recta and obliqua are combined, as frequently in Xen. = ὧν πυνθανόμεθα ... οἷς ἂν ἐπιμελὲς ᾖ. It expresses the thought of the poets. (Others seem to consider πυνθάνονται as hist. pres. and εἴη as pure iterative opt.)

8. καὶ κατ’ ἤπειρον —i.e. they not only carried on piracy at sea, but plundered one another on land as well. κατ’ ἤπειρον = κατὰ γῆν. That Thuc. is thinking here of the towns near the coast is shown by c. 7.5 αἱ δὲ παλαιαἳπόλεις)διὰ τὴν λῃστείαν ἀπὸ θαλάσσης ᾠκίσθησαν.

10. τῷ παλαιῷ τρόπῳ —i.e. κατὰ κώμας οἰκούμενα καὶ ἁρπαζόμενα .

περί —in the parts about. The names of the people are used by Thuc. indifferently with the place-names.

12. τε —and so.

13. σιδηροφορεῖσθαι —below we have the act.: the mid. means to provide one's self with, see that one has. Such compounds of φορῶ (cf. κανηφορῶ, χρυσοφορῶ) are not ordinarily used in mid.; but cf. Aristot. Pol. 2.1268b ἐσιδηροφοροῦντό τε γὰρ οἱ Ἕλληνες, καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας ἐωνοῦντο παρ’ ἀλλήλων.

16. οἰκήσεις — settlements, the πόλεις of c. 5. 1.

17. (διὰ τὰς ) ... ἐφόδους —their hazardous intercourse.

ξυνήθη κτλ = ξυνήθως ἐδιῃτῶντο.

19. ταῦτα ... ἔτι οὕτω νεμόμενα —the fact that in these parts of Greece men still live in this way. This predicative use of the partic. is less common in Gk. than in Lat. (see M. T. 829 b). It is most often found with prepositions, and especially in phrases indicating time, with μετά, ἐπί, ἁμά. With certain well-defined exceptions, it does not occur unless the noun and verb yield sense without the partic.; i.e. the partic, was felt to be separate from the noun.

20. ἐς πάντας ὁμοίων —lit. extending in similar form to all, like ἐς ὀλίγους οἰκεῖν in 2.37. 1. The substitution of the noun διαιτημάτων for the verb inf. τοῦ ... διαιτᾶσθαι with snitable constrn. Is characteristic of the old style.

21. ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι —the undoubted exx of this idiom in Thuc are, besides this place (where Prof. Tucker wrongly says the evidence favours πρώτοις), 3.82. 1 (στάσις)ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο: 7.24. 3 μέγιστον καὶ ἐν τοῖς πρῶτον: ib. 71. 3 ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα : 8.90. 1 ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα. In 7.19. 4 the MSS. give ἐν τοῖς πρώτοις (not πρῶτοι): ib. 27, ἐν τοῖς πρώτοις (not πρῶτον or πρώτη): in viii. 89 ἑν τοῖς πρώτοις (not πρῶτοι). Pre-eminence is not necessarily implied in any example, and Herbst is perhaps right in saying that prominence only is meant. If so, it may be that the nom. is due only to attraction to the subject; the principle being naturally extended to the adverb.

22. ἀνειμένῃ τῇ διαίτῃ —dat, of manner.

24. αὐτοῖς —ethic dat., very common in Thuc, where the gen. might be used.

25. εὐδαιμόνων —in the popular meaning

διὰ τὸ ἁβροδίαιτον —with φοροῦντες. For the long linen (Ionian) χιτων worn by Ionians, Carians, Lydians see Gardner and Jevons, Gk. Ant. p. 49. Cf. Aesch. Persae 41 ἁβροδιαίτων δ’ ἕπεται Λυδῶν ὄχλος. Aften the Persian wars the short (Dorian) χιτών of wool was substituted for it.

οὐ πολὺς χρόνος ἐπειδή —no long time ago. ἀφ’ οὖ, ἐξ οὗ, ἐπεί, ὡς, ὅτε are all found in such phrases.

27. χρυσῶν τεττίγων seem to be pins with figures of grasshoppers at the end. Several might be used, apparently, for one κρώβυλος, like hairpins. Helbig, however, thinks that metal spiral ornaments through which the ‘tail’ of the hair was passed are meant, and Studniczka supports this view; but it does not seem probable. The κρώβυλος—which doubtless took different forms—is perhaps to be recognised on ancient monuments, since Xen. Anab. 5. 4. 13 speaks of leather helmets adorned with a κρώβυλος and resembling a tiara (the various forms of which are well known). εἴρω, twist, favours ‘coil’; but, if the pins had a bend in them, we can understand ἔνερσις. (The v.l. ἐν ἔρσει is prob. a false division like ἐν τομῇ for ἐντομῆ, c. 93. 5.) Cf. Aristoph. Eq. 1325, Nub. 984.

28. ἀφ’ οὗ —from this circumstance It is likely that Thuc. is mistaken in saying that the Athenians carried the fashion to Asia Minor, and that it spread rather from the Ionians (Carrans, Lydians) to the Athenians. Cf. Herod. 5.88 .

1. ἐπὶ πολύ —temporal.

μετρίᾳ —this may mean that the Dorians too for a time had worn the ‘Ionian’ dress; but more probably Thuc. in μετρίᾳ and ἐς τὸν νῦν τρόπον thought rather of the Athenians, and meant merely that the Spartans originated the ‘Dorian’ χιτών.

4. ἰσοδίαιτοι with πρὸς τοὺς πολλούς, τὰ μείζω, which is unusual for τὰ πλείω, is thought to refer to the fact that land was the sole form of wealth in early Sparta.

6. ἐς τὸ φανερὸν ἀποδύντες —ες τὸ φ. is a standing phrase for ‘openly,’ ‘in public,’ with verbs of motion, or suggestive of motion. The simplest form of phrase is such as ἐς τὸ φ. ἐνεγκεῖν (Hyperid. I. v. 3), but Thuc., as so often, strains the use of the prep.

λίπα —with oil, frequent in Homer. It is generally explained as instrumental case, but K. W Kruger calls it internal accus.

μετὰ τοῦ —in company with, i.e. ‘when they ...,’ as 3.59. 3 βίου κίνδυνος ἐλλὺς μετ’ αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ τελευτᾶν λόγου).

7. ἠλείψαντο —reflexive mid. like λούομαι, ὁπλίζομαι, and other words of the toilet.

8. διαζώματα — Il. 23, 683 ζῶμα δέ οἱ πρῶτον παρακάββαλεν.

10. πέπαυται —sc. τὸ διαζωματα ἔχοντας ἀγωνιζεσθαι .

The order is ἔτι δὲ καὶ νῦν ἐν τοῖς β ἔστιν οἷς (= ἐνίοις), καὶ μάλιστἁἐν)τοῖς Ἀσιανοῖς. In the nom. plur, always εἰσὶν οἴ, αἵ; in oblique cases always ἔστιυ ὧν etc. in Thuc, unless words intervene, as in vii. 25 ἦσαν τῶν σταυρῶν οὕς.

12. ἆθλα τίθεται καί = ἄθλων τιθεμένων.

13. πολλὰ ... ὁμοιότροπα —internal accus. to διαιτώμενον.

16. ὅσαι μέν κτλ .—“This clause (down to ἕκαστοι ἰσχύος) is really subordinate to αἱ δὲ παλαιαί κτλ . Whereas the most recent cities, etc,” Forbes.

17. πλωιμωτέρων ὄντων —when navigation was easier, impers, gen. abs. corresponding to πλωιμώτερα ἐγένετο 8. 2. It is a question whether περιουσίας ... ἔχουσαι goes closely with πλωιμωτέρων ὄντων, so that καί joins νεώτατα to ἔχουσαι, or belongs to ἐκτίζοντο: c. 8 καταστάντος τοῦ Μίνω ναυτικοῦ πλωιμώτερα ἐγένετο (i.e. as early as Minos) favours the former; but c. 8.3 seems to show that Thuc. uses νεώτατα here vaguely of cities founded since Minos purged the seas.

20. ἀπελάμβανον — occupied, cutting them off from the mainland with walls. The change of subject from the placenames to their inhabitants is common, e.g. 6.48; 74. 1; 75. 2; 88. 8; 94. 1.

21. ἕκαστοι —in this place because it goes closely with πρὸς τοὺς προσοίκους. On the order of ἕνεκα see 5. 1.

22. ἐπὶ πολύ —temporal.

23. On ἀντίσχουσαν (=διὰ τὸ τὴν λ. ἀντίσχειν) see 6. 2 l. 19.

24. καὶ ἐν —the art. not repeated, as often in Thuc. (6. 1), even when the two members are contrasted.

25. ἔφερον —sc. οἱ λῃστεύοντες. They plundered not only one another but those who, though not sea-farers, lived on the coasts (=παραθαλάσσιοι ἦσαν ).

1. οἱ νησιῶται —the island barbarians were pirates οὐχ ἧσσον ἢ οἱ Ἕλληνες.

3. ᾤκησαν —previous to the time of Minos.

Δήλου —in 426 B.C.; 3.104. The ‘proof’ applies only to the Carians, whence it may be inferred that the presence of Phoenicians in the islands was questioned by none.

6. ὑπὲρ ἡμισύ —subject, = πλείους τῶν ἡμίσεων (though of course it might be taken as adverbial).

7. τῇ σκευῇ τῶν ὅπλων —lit. their equipment (consisting) of arms, not ‘the style of their arms.’

9. Here Thuc. resumes from c. 4.

πλωιμώτερα ἐλένετο —the neut. plur. as in 7. 1.

10. ἐκ τῶν νήσων —ἐκ for ἐν by (the regular method of) attraction to the verb.

11. ὅτεπερ —namely, when, referring back to c. 4.

12. οἱ παρὰ θάλασσαν —cf. οἱ παρ’ ἔπαλξιν 2.13. 5, παρά with dat. not being used of inanimates except when persons are clearly implied.

15. τείχη περιεβάλλοντο —referring to cities already in existence, but hitherto without walls: hence not as in c. 7.

ὡς πλουσιώτεροι ἑαυτῶν γ. —the omission of αὐτοί in this idiom is rare: ‘as was natural, since they were now growing wealthier than they had been hitherto.’

16. γάρ refers to βεβαιότερον ᾤκουν. The double τε presents the same process under two different aspects.

18. δουλείαν — dependence. as often: so with δουλεύειν. The weaker states became tributaries of the stronger.

περιουσίας ἔχοντες —usually rendered ‘because they had wealth at their command’ and used it to extend their power; but more probably, ‘having funds in hand’ and being anxious to increase them. The more the funds increased, the more eager would they be to inerease them still further.

20 ἐν τοὐτῳ ... ὄντες —when they had now advanced to this condition, i.e. navigated the seas and were grown richer.

21 ὕστερον χρόνῳ —in course of time

22. Ἀ. τέ μοι δοχεῖ —and so it seems to me that it was because, etc.

23. οὐ τοσοῦτον (ὅσον προύχων) with ἄγων, not so much because he was leader of ..., they being bound by their oaths to Tyndareus Tyndareus, Helen's supposed father, made her suitors swear to protect the rights of that one whom she should choose

26. Thuc. supports his view by reference to the origin of the kingship in Atreus' house.

27. Πελοποννησίων —masc., with οἱ, those of the Pel. who have received the truest account by tradition. For the order of the gen. edd. compare c. 48. 4; 126. 11. It is supposed that Thuc. means the Argives, whose legends the Lesbian historian Hellanicus related. A fragment of H gives the story here referred to.

3. τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν ... σχεῖν —lit. secured the naming of the country after himself, though a stranger.

ἔπηλυν —there is no authority for the form ἐπηλύτης in Attic. The passage in Xen. Oec cited in L. & S. is corrupt.

4. μείζω —neut. plur.; ξυνενεχθῆναι , ‘fell to the lot of,’ as often in Herod.; after Thuc. not found in Attic.

5. Εὐρυσθέως μέν κτλ. —the relationship of the persons mentioned is as follows:—ZZZ FAMILY TREE Pelops Perseus Sthenelus m. Nicippe Chrysippus Atreus Eurystheus Agamemnon

ἐν τῇ Ἀττικῇ —according to the story, Eurystheus was killed in the Megarid (Euripides represents him as taken prisoner) when at war with Demophon, king of Athens, from whom he had demanded the surrender of the Heraclidae. The Megarid was then part of Attica.

7. καὶ ἐπιτρέψαντος Εὐ . — there is parataxis here for Ἀτρεῖ δὲ μητρὸς ἀδελφῷ ὄντι ἐπιτρέψαντος.

10. Χρυσίππου —Atreus and Thyestes conspired and murdered Ch. their half brother.

12. καὶ ... παραλαβεῖν —co-ordinate with ἔτι μείζω ξυνενεχθῆναι ... Ἀτρεῖ .

13. καὶ ἅμα —the καί joins δοκοῦντα to βουλομένων.

δυνατόν —i.e. in point of wealth.

17. ἅ —the wealth and power of the two families.

18. καὶ ναυτικῷ —the MSS give καὶ ναυτικῷ τε, and two explanations are suggested: (1) τε = too, Shilleto; and (2) τε = and, while καί emphasises ναυτικῷ . thuc. 6.44 καὶ πρός τε τοὺς *(πηγίνους, 8.68. 2 καὶ αὐτός τε , 8.76. 5 καὶ ἑαυτούς τε give rise to a similar question. The use of τε is supported by examples in Herod. and tragedy; but the MS. variants and certain examples of corruption in the case of τε are so numerous that it is very doubtful if the passages can be relied on. On the whole καὶ ... δέ = and moreover is more probable.

19. ἰσχύσας —ingressive.

20. οὐ ... τὸ πλέον ἤ =ἧσσον ἤ.

χάριτι ... φόβῳ — for the contrast cf. Dem. 20.16 μείζων ὁ τοῦ μέλλοντος φόβος τῆς παρούσης χάριτος, but there it is the fear and good-will felt; here it is the feelings inspired.

21. φαίνεται γάρ —the passages referred to are Il. 2.576 τῶν ἑκατὸν νεῶν ἦρχε κρείων Ἀγαμέμνων, and 2.612-613 αὐτὸς γάρ σφιν δῶκεν ἄναξ άνδρῶν Ἀγαμέμνων νῆας, and so on.

23. ὡς ... τοῦτο —Shilleto refers to Plat. Theaet. 193 D ὃ ἐν τοῖς πρόσθεν οὕτως ἔλεγον for a similar redundancy.

τῳ —in any one's opinion. To τεκμηριῶσαι supply τοῦτο: it is only with ref. to the details that Thuc. suggests a doubt.

24. ἐν τοῦ σκήπτρου τῇ παραδόσει —in the passage where the sceptre of Agamemnon is said to have been transmitted through his family; Il. 2.101-108. For this method of referring to passages in times before the division into books, etc. was made cf. c. 10. 4; Mark 12.26 ἐπὶ τῆς βάτου ; Ep. Rom. 11.2.

26. οὐκ ἂν ... ἐκράτει —he would not have been ruler (as he was). Classen's version, ‘he would not be (in the Iliad) ruler,’ is less likely.

27. οὐχ ἂν εἶεν — MT 238 .

2. καὶ ταύτῃ τῇ στρατείᾳ —i.e. this expedition itself was not on a very large scale. All the more insignificant must have been those undertakings that preceded it.

4. ὅτι μέν —lit. that M. was a small place, or if any of the towns of those days seems now insignificant—(this) could not be considered a valid argument for refusing to believe that, etc. (1) The clauses introduced by ὅτι and εἰ form the object to χρώμενος. (2) The μέν is not regularly answered, but is resumed in οὐκ οὖν ἀπιστεῖν χρή (10.3) after a long parenthesis. (3) ἦν may mean was before its destruction, which is said by later writers to have occurred in 468 B.C. (there is no sufficient ground for doubting the statement). This is supported by νῦν δοκεῖ which refers to towns still in existence. Or it may be ‘was in heroic times,’ and this is supported by τότε. But, whichever be meant, the argument is not affected. The simple explanation of the insignificance of Mycenae—now of prime importance to the archaeologist—is that the only part that could be called ‘city’ was the acropolis, and that was occupied by the castle of the chief. The rest of the settlement consisted of the villages of the clans; and there is no sign that in historic times the villages ever gave way to a city. Thuc. represents the fact correctly.

9. λόγος κατέχει —fama obtinet ; tradition affirms.

Λακεδαιμονίων γάρ —there were no signs of magnificence about Sparta until after the triumphs of Lysander. Even then, its appearance, remote from the world and unfortified, must have been comparatively insignificant. It does not seem clear that Thuc. wrote this passage before 404 B.C.

11. κατασκευῆς —κ. includes everything that makes a place habitable and usable. Here ‘buildings.’

13. πρός —in comparison with.

14. τῶν πέντε τὰς δύο μ. —two-fifths. (‘Two of the five divisions’ is, as Mr. Forbes remarks, wrong.) Of course Messenia is included in Laconia. Notice the way in which fractions are expressed. The gen. is omitted when the denominator is one higher than the numerator—as τὰ τρία μέρη = 3/4.

15. τῆς ξυμπάσης —roughly speaking. In 2.9 Thuc. expressly notes that Argos was not under the leadership of Sparta. But the omission here is of no importance, because we do not want an exact statement, but a general account of the power of Sparta.

16. τῶν ἔξω ξ. —their allies beyond P., who are many.

17. πόλεως —for τῆς πόλεως, since the city was not compactly built. For the omission of art. Steup compares 4.18.3 and 8.95. 2. (Mr. Forbes's rendering ‘when a city is not built continuously’ is disproved by the fact that ἡ δύναμις Λακεδαιμονίων—and not the power of any city—must be supplied to φαίνοιτ’ ἄν. Herbst's view that πόλεως is predicative—since it has not been brought together into a compact city—is inconsistent with Λακεδαιμονίων ἡ πόλις above.)

18. κατασκευαῖς —the plur. in concrete sense, as in 2.65. 2.

21. διπλασίαν ... ἤ —these compounds are constructed as comparatives. πολλαπλάσιοι τῶν ἐναντίων 4. 94; πολλαπλάσιοι ἢ ἦλθον 127; διπλασια δοῦναι ἢ ἄλλῳ τινί Lysias 19.52.

22. εἰκάζεσθαι depends on οἶμαι.

ἀπὸ τῆς φ. ὄψεως — not ‘from the notable or striking appearance’ (Forbes), but ‘from the mere (external) appearance.’ φανερός is, as usual, what is seen, and ὄψις is the appearance in contrast with the reality, as in 6.31 τῇ ὄψει ἀνεθάρσουν (where my rendering ‘by the sight’ is also wrong).

26. μεγίστην μὲν γενέσθαι — ‘proved, it is true.’

δέ —and yet. For τῶν πρὸ αὐτῆς cf. 1. 1.

λειπομένην with gen. as 6.72 οὐδενὸς λειπόμενος.

1. ἥν —rel. to στρατείαν. According to the regular principle in Greek, the following clause, to which the nom. is supplied from ἥν, is without the rel. In the second clause the rel. is often replaced by the required case of αὐτός or οὗτος —2.4. 5, ὃ ἦν τοῦ τείχους καὶ αἱ θύραι ἀνεωγμέναι ἔτυχον αὐτοῦ. 7.29. 5 ὅπερ μέγιστον ἦν καὶ ἄρτι ἔτυχον οἱ παῖδες ἐσεληλυθότες. It is the repetition of the rel. that is unusual, as in 6.4. 3 τὸ χωρίον οὗ νῦν ἡ πόλις ἐστὶ καὶ ὃ πρῶτον ἐτειχίσθη. If, however, the first clause is neg. and the second pos., the rel. must be repeated, as in 2.43. 2 οὐκ ἐν ᾧ κεῖνται μᾶλλον, ἀλλ’ ἐν ᾧ ἡ δόξα καταλειπεται. The same omission or substitution is frequent in Lat., as Liv. xxiii.8 cum quo steterat nec cum patria majestas sententia deputerat. In Engl. cf. Whom though to know be life, and joy to make mention of His name. Hooker.Eccles. Pol. we treated her with great respect, which she recerved as customary, and was neither elated by it, nor confused. Johnson.Tour in Heb. To whom she seemed to listen, but did not hear them. Macaulay.Warren Hastings

ἐπὶ τὸ μεῖζον κοσμῆσαι —exaggerate by using his fancy.

3. ἐνδεεστέρα —comparatively insignificant.

πεποίηκε γάρ —out of a fleet of 1200 ships the poet has described those of the B. as carrying 120 men, ἐν δὲ ἑκάστῃ κοῦροι Βοιωτῶν ἑκατὸν καὶ εἴκοσι βαῖνον Il 2. 510-511 and those of Ph. as carrying 50, ἐρέται δ’ ἐν ὲκάστῃ πεντήκοντ ἐμβέβασαν, τόξων εὖ εἰδότες ἶφι μάχεσθαι Hom. Il. 2.719-720 specifying the largest and the smallest ἀνδρῶν is gen. of measure, as in τεῖχος ἑπτὰ σταδίων, almost confined to expressions of magnitude. The absence of a second art. with ἐλαχίστας is interesting: Shilleto rightly compares νικᾷ δ’ ὁ πρῶτος καὶ τελευταῖος δραμών Aesch. Ag. 314 , where the reference is to a team, of which every member wins; just as here the two things combined are items of one fleet. As to the numbers, in Thuc.'s time the average complement of a trireme was 200. Therefore a fleet of 1200 would require 240,000 men: but the rationalistic calculation of Thuc gives about 103,000 for the Trojan War. Of course 103,000 is a far larger number than was sent out by any one state in the time of Thuc. The number of men who sailed for Sicily in 415 B C. may be roughly set down as 36,000. But 10.5 shows that Thuc. thinks of the combined forces of all Greek states, and the forces in the field during the Peloponnesian War would exceed his calculation for the Trojan War. (It seems, nevertheless, that Thuc. has not made out a very satisfactory case: τῶν νῦν in 10.3 should have been qualified.)

7. ἄλλων depends on μεγέθους.

8. αὐτερέται — the fighting men served also as rowers. This was quite unusual in Thuc.'s day. See Il. 719 quoted above.

9. ἐν —as ἐν ... παραδόσει c. 9. 4, and ἐν νεῶν καταλόγῳ above.

11. περίνεως —the only passengers would be the kings and those immediately under them.

13. μέλλοντας ... ἔχοντας —though these agree with περίνεως, they apply in sense equally to all the Greeks. We should expect gen. abs.

14. μετὰ σκευῶν —the want of space is what Thuc. alludes to. The room not taken up by the rowers would be filled with materials.

15. κατάφαρκτα —i.e. the boats had no gangways projecting along them. These gangways ( πάροδοι) were used only in ships with a deep draught, and Thuc means that, as there were none in ‘Homeric’ ships, those ships can have had only a small draught, and therefore there was not much room in them. At intervals along the πάροδοι were upright posts, and the open spaces between could be closed with curtains (παραρρύματα) in battle or rough weather, and thus served in a trireme to protect the bodies of the thranitae (top set of rowers). The word is generally explained ‘decked’, but so far as one can judge, the only connexion between κατάστρωμα, the deck from end to end, and κατάφαρκτος is that only ships that were κατάφαρκτοι had καταστρώματα. The Homeric ships, it is true, had no καταστρώματα, but this is not the point here.

16. λῃστικώτερον —more like pirate craft than warships.

17. πρός —as compared with. σκοποῦντι is dat. of the person judging, a frequent use of a partic.; cf. c. 21. 2

19. ὡς —considering that.

21. αἴτιον —this predicate, so often in neut. sing. whatever be gender and number of the subject, is practically a noun.

23. τε —answered by ἐπειδὴ δέ, as e.g. in 6.83. 1; 7. 81; and c. 25. 3.

24. ὅσον —only so large as.

αὐτόθεν with βιοτεύσειν, support itself in the (enemy's) country.

25. ἀφικόμενοι —on their arrival, i.e. immediately after they landed. (This passage, from this word to the end of 11.2, is much disputed.)

26. μάχῃ ἐκράτησαν —the conjecture ἐκρατήθησαν reduces the words τοῖς αἰεὶ ... ὄντες below to absurdity; and κρατοῦντες would have to be changed to κρατήσαντες. The Greeks were able to raise a rampart because they had won a victory.

τὸ γάρ — for otherwise. This rampart is not that referred to in Il. vii. 336 and 433 as built in the tenth year by the counsel of Nestor, but one built immediately after the arrival of the Greeks, though this does not necessitate inserting εὐθύς after ἄν with Dittrich. Similarly the γεωργία τῆς Χερσονήσου below is not heard of in the Il. Thuc. doubtless got these details from a poem that related the earlier events of the war. Cf. the Schol. here: ἔρυμα λέγει νῦν οὐχ ὅπερ ἐν τῇ ή λέγει Ὅμηρος γενέσθαι, ἀλλὰ πρότερον μικρότερον διὰ τὰς τῶν βαρβάρων ἐπιδρομάς. (Strabo quotes the opinion of Aristotle that the τεῖχος of Il. 7, which was so promptly destroyed by Poseidon, was in reality never built. It seems impossible that Thuc. can have had that τεῖχος in mind)

27. φαίνονται δέ — this is δέ in apodosis, and it is here apparently suggested by the contrast set up by the parenthesis: though they fortified a camp, they did not employ their whole force. This δέ generally follows a parenthesis; but not in 2.65. 1 ἐπειδὴ ὁ πόλεμος κατέστη, ὁ δὲ φαίνεται καὶ ἐν τούτῳ προγνοὺς τὴν δύναμιν

28. ἐνταῦθα —before Troy; and consequently the Trojans held out.

2. αὐτῶν —of their own accord.

τὰ δέκα ἔτη —those ten years.

3. βίᾳ —in the field. They were not penned up in the city.

ὑπολειπομένοις —imperf., who at any given time were left behind.

7. ῥᾳδίως ἂν μάχῃ ... Τροίαν εἷλον — does this passage refer to ‘the two natural stages of the expedition’— battle followed by siege, or two alternative means of taking Troy,—either by pitched battle outside the gates, or by siege? Those who adopt the first, either (a) bracket the first εἷλον with Kruger as spurious, and explain the δ’ after πολιορκίᾳ as (a violent) apodotic δέ, or, with Kruger bracket it; or else (b) make the first εἷλον mean, not ‘capture (Troy),’ but, with Herbst, ‘defeat (the Trojans).’ Those who adopt the second with Bauer, make μάχῃ κρατοῦντες = ‘by superiority in the field,’ and not ‘being as they were superior in the field’; and πολιορκίᾳ προσκαθεζόμενοι = ‘by a regular siege,’ instead of ‘by persisting in a siege.’ But the difficulties involved in this are insuperable; for—apart from the extraordinary way in which the supposed alternative methods are expressed, and joined by δέ instead of ἤ—the sense obtained, though at first sight attractive, makes περιουσίαν ἔχοντες τροφῆς and ξυνεχῶς τὸν πόλεμον διέφερον pointless in so far as the first method— superiority in the field + assault—is concerned; it necessitates forcing the meaning by an immediate assault (κατὰ κράτος) into μάχῃ κρατοῦντες, and thus making this wholly distinct from μάχῃ ἐκράτησαν in 11.1; and it strains no less the meaning of πολιορκίᾳ προσκαθεζόμενοι. We therefore prefer the first plan, but slightly modified; if the first εἷλον is genuine, it is probably a mere anticipation of the second. Trans. If they had ... carried on the war persistently, they would easily have continued superior in the field and have taken the city, seeing that ... : if, then, they had persisted in a siege, they would have taken Troy.

προσκαθεζόμενοι governs πολιορκίᾳ .

11. ἀλλά —in contrast with περιουσίαν εἰ ἦλθον ἔχοντες τροφῆς.

τούτων —i.e. τῶν Τρωικῶν.

13. τῶν πρίν —c. 1. 1; 10. 3.

γενόμενα —though it proved.

15. κατεσχηκότος —attributive. When an attributive partic. is itself further defined—διὰ τοὺς ποιητὰς κατεσχηκότος—it is frequently placed outside the art. This idiom is by no means confined to Thuc.

16 μετανίστατο — Greece (i.e. the Greeks) was still occupied with migration and settlement, so that the country did not quiet down (ingressive) and so increase.

Ἑλλάς here is used as in c. 6, for the Greek nation—ἡ Ἑ. ἐσιδηροφόρει—and this explains (a) the use of μετανίστατο, (b) the accus. ἡσυχάσασαν, for which, as it refers to the subject of the main verb, ἡσυχάσασα would be expected. Ἑλλάς takes a slightly different meaning after the ὥστε. A similar change of meaning may be detected in 7.34. 6 ναυμαχήσαντες δὲ ἀντίπαλα καὶ ὡς αὐτοὺς ἑκατέρους ἀξιοῦν νικᾶν, where the ὡς-clause is general in sense, the way in which both sides lay claim to victory.

17. ὥστε μὴ ἡ. αὐξηθῆναι —the μή belongs to both partic. and infin., and ὥστε ... αὐξηθῆναι expresses ἀχρηματία.

20. ἐνεόχμωσε = ενεωτέρισε In sense this is pluperf. The verb occurs in Herod, but only here in Attic. Thuc. thought of the fate of Agamemnon, Teucer, and other heroes.

καὶ στάσεις —two things are not clear, (1) whether the disturbances alluded to are intended to be connected with the return from Troy, or merely to be an explanation of ὥστε μὴ ἡσυχάσασαν αὐ.; (2) how Βοιωτοί τε γάρ is connected with what precedes. The passage is commonly referred to as though γάρ introduced an illustration of the στάσεις, but Steup (who thinks γάρ spurious) rightly points out that we hear nothing of στάσις in the matter of the migrations referred to. If γάρ is retained, we must assume that the migrations are introduced as an illustration of the general unrest that continued; i e. the γάρ refers rather to 12.1 than to the immediately preceding sentence.

21. ὡς ἐπὶ πολύ —for the most part, ‘in most cases.’

ἀφ’ ὧν —as the result of which, referring to στάσεις .

22. τὰς πόλεις —prob. the article is distributive=cities in each instance (Others, ‘the well-known cities’: but this is rightly objected to by several edd as a strange assumption of knowledge and as clashing awkwardly with ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν)

23. οἱ νῦν —meaning not that the Boeotians had changed their name, but the Boeotians ‘as we know them now,’ i.e. as inhabiting all Boeotia, instead of dwelling partly in Thessaly and partly in Boeotia.

ἑξηκοστῷ ἔτει —the instances seem to be chosen in order to show that disturbances continued for a long period after the war.

μετὰ Ἰλίου ἅλωσιν —the art. replaced by a gen., as in διὰ χρόνου πλῆθος c. 1. 2.

26. ἀποδασμός —i.e. a part that had voluntarily separated from the main body, not ἀνάσταντες, like the rest. The word only here in Attic; but cf. Φωκέες ἀποδάσμιοι Hdt. 1.146.1 .

27. ἀφ’ ὧν —the plur. κατὰ σύνεσιν. The ref. is to Il. 2.494, where the Boeotians, however, possess the chief cities of Boeotia.

2. ἔσχον —cf. σχεῖν, c. 9. 2.

3 ἡσυχάσασα βεβαίως —gaining unbroken rest and no longer subject to violent changes. Notice the ingressive aor. and imperf. combined.

5. Ἴωνας —the Ionian cities of Asia Minor. νησιωτῶν —the Cyclades; cf. c. 4. Isocr. Panath. 43.

6. Ἰταλίας —i.e. the modern Calabria, the peninsula reaching to the Lius on W. and to Metapontum on E. The chief Peloponnesian founders of Sicilian and Italian cities were the Corinthians who founded Syracuse, and through Syracuse, Camarina [Acrae and Casmenae], the Megarians who founded the Hyblaean Megara, and through Megara, Selinus: the Achaeans who founded Sybaris and Croton, some Lacedaemonians who founded Tarentum. Forbes . But (1) Megara is not part of the Peloponnese (2.9), see next note; (2) it is not clear that Tarentum is reckoned in Italy.

8. ἔστιν ἃ χωρία —it is supposed that the colonies of Corinth in the W., Corcyra, Leucas, Ambracia, etc. are referred to. If so (1) τὸ πλεῖστον above is an exaggeration; (2) Ἑλλάς is here used for all the country ultimately inhabited by Greeks—as in Thuc.'s time: but Ἑλλάς was not so used above; (3) the vagueness of the reference to these colonies is strange. Steup gets over all these difficulties by taking ἔστιν ἃ χωρία as nom., so that the Megarian (see last note), Locrian and Chalcidian colonies would be included. This is tempting, and for the use of χωρία we might compare τὰ τρέφοντα ἡμᾶς χωρία τῆς Ἰταλίας, ὁρῶντα ἐν ᾧ ἐσμεν 7.14 . But it must be confessed that (1) ἔστιν ἅ looks like an antithesis to τὸ πλεῖστον: (2) πάντα δὲ ταῦτα appears to refer to ἔστιν ἃ χωρία as well as to the colonies mentioned before. Perhaps Thuc. writes somewhat vaguely here.

11. ἔτι ... ἢ πρότερον —referring to c. 8. 3.

12. τὰ πολλά —in most cases.

13. τῶν προσόδων μ. γιγνομένων —this goes closely with καθίσταντο, tyrannies were established where the revenues (of the government) increased. But δυνατωτέρας ... ποιουμένης is a general statement with regard to Greece, and qualifies the whole sentence down to ἀντείχοντο. Thuc. means that a tyranny was generally established in a city enjoying a large revenue, which one man, whether a member of the governing class or not, succeeded in getting into his hands as the result of political agitation.

14. πρότερον δέ —not necessarily immediately before, for in most cases oligarchy preceded tyranny, but in earlier days where one man ruled, his power was limited.

ἐπὶ ῥητοῖς γέρασι —with (under the condition of) fixed prerogatives, viz. as priest, judge and leader (Arist. Pol. 3.14, 12). The purpose of this parenthesis is to point out that the rule of a single man, though it was known before the age of the tyrants, had been of a wholly different character. The age of the tyrants synchronises with an advance in Greece; yet the deeds even of the tyrants were relatively insignificant. As to tyranny, Aristotle agrees with Thuc.: ἐπεὶ δὲ χεἰρους γενόμενοι ἐχρηματίζοντο ἀπὸ τῶν κοινῶν, ἐντεῦθέν ποθεν εὔλογον γενέσθαι τὰς ὀλιγαρχίας ... ἐκ δὲ τούτων πρῶτον εἰς τυραννίδας μετέβαλον.

17. ἐγγύτατα —superlative of ἐγγύς. Cf. prope and propius.

18. μεταχειρίσαι —Thuc., like Herod., uses the act. of this word, whereas other authors use mid.

19. καὶ ... ναυπηγηθῆναι —καί = and in fact, the building of a trireme marking a climax in naval affairs (τὰ περὶ τὰς ναῦς).

τῆς Ἑλλάδος goes with πρῶτον: cf. 2.18 ἀφίκετο τῆς Ἀττικῆς ἐς Οἰνόην πρῶτον. Hdt. 1.163 πρώτῃ δὲ Φωκαίῃ Ἰωνιης επεχείρησε.—The τετρήρης made its appearance in the second half of the fourth cent., and was the normal type of ship in the hellenistic period. It is not likely that it had four banks of oars.

22. ναῦς —whether these were triremes or not does not appear.

23. τοῦδε τοῦ πολέμου —the dates given are circ. 704 and 664 B.C. (or, if the Archidamian War is meant, see Introd. p. xxvi, circ. 721 and 681 B.C.).

24. ὅτε — since.

Σαμίοις ἦλθε —the dat, after (simple) verbs of motion is common in tragedy, but does not occur in Attic prose outside Thuc.; cp. c. 27. 1; 61. 1; 107. 7.

25. γίγνεται —turns out to be.

26. καὶ ταύτῃ —lit. this too reckons 260 years. The καί brings the battle into relation with the event above. (Thuc. seems to be maintaining the priority of Corinth against some other claimant.) The ταύτῃ is possessive dat, as Herod. 2.33 Ἡρακλέἱ ὅσα φασὶ εἷναι ἔτεα ἐς Ἄμασιν.

1. τὴν πόλιν —their city.

2. αἰεὶ δή ποτε —as δή ποτε means in the past (frequent in tragedy), so αἰεὶ δή ποτε = always in the past, i.e. ‘from the earliest times.’

3. τῶν Ἑλλήνων ... ἐπιμισγόντων —two points are made: (1) the early commerce of the Greeks was carried on mainly by land, (2) the Isthmus was on the high-road between οἱ ἐντός and οἱ ἔξω Π. The sentence would be much clearer with a partic. like πορευομένων, as proposed by Steup, after Ἑλλήνων, so that τε would mean and.

7. ἀφνειόν —we have only one instance, Il. 2.570.

9. μᾶλλον ἔπλῳζον —cf. c. 8. 2 .

τὰς ναῦς —the ships referred to in 13.2. These enabled Greece to extinguish piracy, and thus to further her commerce; and the outcome of that, it is implied, was the formation of a considerable fleet.

11. ἀμφότερα with παρέχοντες, in both ways, i.e. as the context shows, by sea and land. ἀμφότερα and κατ’ ἀμφότερα do not of themselves mean on both elements, but show the same accus. as τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, and κατὰ πολλοὺς τρόπους. It is the context that gives the special meaning.

ἔσχον —ingressive.

12. Ἴωσιν — those of Asia Minor, among whom the Phocaeans and Samos are specially mentioned.

13. ἐπὶ Κύρου —556-529 B.C.

16. Κύρῳ πολεμοῦντες —they were ultimately reduced by Harpagus. Cf. c. 16.

17. ἐπὶ Καμβύσου —C. reigned 529-521 B.C Polycrates ruled 532-521 B.C. According to Herod. 3.33, Samos was πολίων πασέων πρώτη Ἑλληνίδων καὶ βαρβάρων in the time of Polycrates.

19. *(πηνείαν ἑλών —Herod. 3.33 assigns far more imposing achievements to Polycrates: cf. ib. 122 τῆς δὲ ἀνθρωπίνης (i.e. not ‘heroic,’ like Minos) λεγομένης γενεῆς Πολυκράτης πρῶτος, ἐλπίδας πολλὰς ἔχων Ἰωνίης τε καὶ νήσων ἄρξειν. This gift was made to the Delian Apollo as the Ionian deity.

21. Μασσαλίαν οἰκίζοντες —at the time when they founded Massilia. Hdt. 1.166 gives an account of a victory of the Etruscans and Carthaginians about 546 B.C., the time of which Thuc. is here speaking. But Eusebius and others placed the foundation of Marseilles 600 B.C.: there is plainly a diserepancy in the dates given for its foundation. (Classen in the 3rd ed. took ἐνίκων to mean gained victories, and referred them to 600 B.C.; but Thuc. is plainly referring to circ. 546 B.C. See Steup's appendix.)

22. ταῦτα γάρ —these, in fact, were the strongest navies, i.e. the strongest possessed by Iomans (cf. 14.6 ).

23. φαίνεται with χρώμενα and ἐξηρτυμένα: ‘though these fleets were built ... we find’ etc.

25. πεντηκοντόροις —Gardner and Jevons, p. 652. It is plain from Herod. 1. 163 that penteconters counted as νῆες μακραί, and stand in contrast to νῆες στρογγύλαι, merchant-ships (cf. Thuc. 2.97. 1). Therefore the πλοῖα μακρά are doubtless long ships of larger and smaller size than penteconters. To their resemblance in size to merchant - ships the word πλοῖα seems to point.

26. ἐκεῖνα —those existing in the time of the Trojan War.

27. τοῦ Δαρείου θανάτου —485 B.C. ἐβασίλευσε , ‘reigned,’ rather than ‘became king.’

29. περί τε Σικελίαν —for the vague use of περί cf. Isocr. v. 111 εῖχε μεγίστην δύναμιν τῶν περὶ τὴν Ἀσίαν. This is the age of the great Sicilian tyrants—Thero, Gelo, Hiero.

30 ἐς πλῆθος ἐγένοντο —reached a considerable number; probably the lit. sense is ‘came to.’

3. εἴ τινες ἄλλοι —sc. ἐκέκτηντο ναυτικά.

4. βραχέα —sc. ναυτικά, small fleets. This sense of βραχύς is fiequent in Thuc.

5. τὰ πολλά —the greater part of these consisted of.

ὀψέ τε ἀφ’ οὗ —sc ἧν, it was late when. For ἀφ οὗ we should expect ὅτε. but instead of saying ‘already when they started to build, it was so late that they could not get a strong fleet before the invasion of Xeixes,’ he says ‘from the time that they started’ etc. The building of the ships took place in 483-82 B C., the archonship of Nicodemus, and the invasion in 480 B.C. Herod. 7.33 does not say that Them, looked forward to a Persian invasion when he advised the building of the ships. It is thought that Herod, wanted to belittle Them

9. ἐναυμάχησαν —at Salamis

διὰ πάσης — throughent, an adverbial expression like ἀπὸ τῆς ἴσης c. 15; ἀπὃτῆς)πρώτης, etc. (This is better than supplying νεώς )

10. καταστρώματα —the Homeric ship was covered only fore and aft, the part in which the men rowed being open. (Cf. on c. 10. 4.)

12. τὰ παλαιά —i.e. the early fleets mentioned in c. 13. τὰ ὕστερον γενόμενα —i.e. those mentioned in c. 14.3.

14. οὐκ ἐλαχίστην —considerable, in spite of smallness of the fleets.

αὐτοῖς —τοῖς ναυτικοῖς.

χρημάτων προσόδῳ —see c. 13.5. The possession of a fleet enabled them still further to increase their trade.

16. τὰς νήσους κ .—began to or ‘endeavoured to reduce the islands.’ The enterprise of Athens and Corinth is alluded to, as in (ἐκεῖνοἰὅσοι μή .

18. ὅθεν τις — ‘as the result of which any considerable force was brought together,’ or ‘from which any considerable power was gained.’ This seems to be the meaning, corresponding to ἰσχὶν δὲ κτλ. above. But παραγίγνομαι in Thuc. of troops regularly means be assembled in the field, and with dat. ‘come to the support of’ To be added to is προσγίγνομαι. Hence many edd. render ‘in consequence of which any considerable force was collected.’ ὅθεν is then strange.

ξυνέστη —frequently used in this connexion from Herod. downwards.

22. οὐ γὰρ ξυνειστήκεσαν —they were not joined to the strongest states as subjects, nor yet did they of their own accord unite on an equal footing for a campaign.

25. κατ’ ἀλλήλους —inter se.

ὡς ἕκαστοι —cf. c. 3.4. Strictly ἐπολέμουν is supplied with ὡς, but the phrase practieally becomes a distributive nnmeral

27. Χαλκιδέων καὶ Ἐρετριῶν — the date of this war, fought for the possession of the Lelantian plain, is unknown. Herod says that Samos helped Chalcis and Miletus helped Eretria, and of course both sides must have attracted many other allies. The ultimate cause of the war was commercial rivalry. (Busolt i. p. 313.)

1. καὶ τὸ ἄλλο Ἑ —the rest of the Greeks also took sides as allies of the one or the other.

2. ἐπεγένετο —often of unfavourable occurrences, especially of anything sudden and unexpected, such as natural phenomena.

3. ἄλλοθι —in different parts.

μή —according to the constr, with verbs of hindrance (M.T. 749, 807), though κωλύω generally has the simple infin.

4. καί —and in particular.— Ἴωσι is governed both by προχωρησάντων and by ὲπεστράτευσε There is an anacoluthon at ἐπεστρύτευσε, for strictly ὲπεγένετο should govern Ἴωσι with an abstract noun parallel to κωλύματα for its subject.

6. βασιλεία —MSS. authority is altogether in favour of this against ἐξουσία, and ἐξουσία does not seem to occur before Aristotle in this sense. Stahl thinks βασιλεία is a gloss on ἐξουσία. But it is possible that ἐξουσία itself is a gloss. The matter is complicated by the fact that both βασιλεία and ἐξουσία have a double sense (ἐξουσία, power to do a thing, a ‘power’; cf. βασιλεία τὸ ἀξίωμα καὶ τὸ ἔθνος βασιλευόμενον, Suidas). Of course here the sense is concrete.

Κροῖσον —the destruction of the Lydian monarchy was 546 B.C., Herod 1.87 etc.

ὅσα —a part. of εἰμί is constantly omitted after ὅσος.

ἐντὸς Ἅλυος ποταμοῦ —ἐντός from the Greek point of view. When ποταμός is added the art. is regularly inserted before the name of a river in Attic. But Herod. does not use the art., and Thuc. omits it in six passages. The only other known exx. are Isocr. 7, 80 (also ἐντὸς Ἅλυος π.) and Xen. Anab. 4.7.18.

9. καὶ τὰς νήσους —according to Herod. 1. 169, when the Ioman cities of the mainland submitted to Harpagus, the islands also gave in; but no doubt the submission of the islands was incomplete. Otherwise the rise of Polycrates would be unaccountable. Thuc. alludes to their reduction after Lade, 494 B.C.

10. τύραννοι —see c. 13.1. The course of the argument was there broken by the reference to the fleets, which were first dealt with.

11. τὸ ἐφ’ ἑαυτῶν —their own interests.

12. τὸ σῶμα —with regard to their personal good and the increase of their own estate. σῶμα includes safety and enjoyment.

14. δῑ ἀσφαλείας ... μάλιστα =ὅσον ἐδύναντο ἀσφαλέστατα. Had the utmost regard for security in the administration of their cities, i.e. ‘pursued a cautious policy’ by avoiding great enterprises. δι ἀσφαλείας is an adverbial phrase, like those with which ἔχειν is usually found, as δῑ ἐπιμελείας, δῑ ἡσυχίας, διὰ φυλακῆς .

15. ἀπ’ αὐτῶν —on their part.

16. εἰ μὴ εἴ τι —εἰ μὴ εἰ, nisi si, only here in Thuc. (see erit. note). εἰ μή becomes an adverb. M.T. 476, 4.

17. οἱ γάρ —for the use of γάρ cf. c. 14. 1. ‘The Sicilian tyrants in fact attained to the greatest power,’ i.e. greater power than any other of the tyrants (and they fought against their neighbours). The sense of πλεῖστον here is that of c. 1.2 ἐπὶ πλεῖστον ἀνθρώπων. There is no need for excision.

18. οὕτω πανταχόθεν —summing up the whole from c. 13.

19. κατείχετο —was held in check, ‘constrained.’ Cf. c. 16; but the second clause, κατὰ πόλεις τε shows that κατείχετο is felt here not as a verb of prevention, but of compulsion.

22. Ἀθηναίων —the overthrow of Hippias, 510 B.C.

23. οἱ ἐκ τῆς —the prep. by attraction to κατελύθησαν .

ἐπὶ πολὺ κτλ .—lit. which over a large area had been under tyrants even before Athens. The earliest instance was at Sicyon, where Orthagoras became tyrant circ. 670 B.C.

24. οἱ πλεῖστοι ... Σικελίᾳ —limiting apposition to οἱ τύραννοι, καὶ ... Σικελίᾳ explaining πλεῖστοι, most of them, the last in fact except those in Sicily. In Syracuse the tyrants lasted till 466 B.C., when Thrasybulus was expelled.

25. ὑπὸ Αακεδαιμονίων —the Spartans were called μισοτύραννοι. Cf. Aristotle, Pol. v. 10 Αακ. πλείστας κατέλυσαν τυραννίδας. But their traditional policy of tyrant-breaking was dropped in the fourth cent., when αὐτονομία became their watehword. Thus in 371 B.C. an orator is represented by Xen. as taunting the Spartans with preferring tyranny to free institutions. Alcibiades in his speech at Sparta (6.89—winter of 415-4 B.C.) makes a point out of this tradition.

27. τὴν κτίσιν —strictly speaking the Dorians did not found Sparta: it existed before the invasion; but there is no difficulty in speaking of the second founders thus.

1. ὧν ἴσμεν =ἐκείνων οὓς ἴσμεν. The στάσις lasted longer at Sparta than elsewhere: cf. Herod. i 65, the Spartans before Lycurgus κακονομώτατοι ἦσαν σχεδὸν πάντων Ἑλλήνων κατά τε σφέας αὐτοὺς καὶ ξείνοισι ἀπρόσμικτοι. In spite of this, they were the earliest to obtain good laws—μετέβαλον ἐς εὐνομίην (Herod. l.c.)= ηὐνομήθη.

4. τετρακόσια —this gives a later date than 884 B.C. which other authorities assign to Lycurgus.

7. δυνάμενοι =δυνατοὶ ὄντες, see L. & S.

8. μετὰ δέ —the main sentence is resumed after the parenthesis. Cf. the use of δἕδ’ οὖν) in c. 11. 1 ; οὖν in 7.42. 3 ; δέ is frequent. So autem, sed, igitur.

τὴν κατάλυσιν ἐκ τῆς Ἑλλάδος —the art. is not repeated with a verbal substantive. The words necessary to complete its sense generally follow, but sometimes precede it, as in 2.18. 3 κατὰ τὴν ἄλλην πορείαν ἡ σχολαιότης. In the latter case, the prepositional phrase is connected with the verb of the sentence (cf. 2.7. 2 ; 38. 1) as well as with the verbal substantive.

10. καὶ ἡ ἐν Μαραθῶνι μάχη —i.e. now begins the modern period, τὰ Μηδικά.

12. τῷ μ. στόλῳ —the great armada.

14. ἐπικρεμασθέντος —impending, as ii. 53. 4; 3.40. 7.

16. τῶν ξυμπολεμησάντων —this and ἡγήσαντο are ingressive; ‘assumed the leadership of those who entered on the war as allies.’ προύχοντες —causal.

19. καὶ ἀνασκευασάμενοι ... ἐσβάντες ... ἐγένοντο =ἁναλαβόντες τὰ σκεύη ἐσέβησαν καὶ ἐγένοντο. Observe the historical importance of ναυτικοὶ ἐγένοντο, which is emphasised hy its connexion with ἡγήσαντο τῶν Ἑλλήνων.

20. ἀπωσάμενοι ... διεκρίθησαν —the subject modified in the course of the sentence from ‘the confederates’ to the confederates exclusive of Athens and Sparta, and those Asiatic cities and islands that revolted from Persia after Salamis.

24. ταῦτα —Athens and Sparta. διεφάνη —it had become clear that, denoting the singling out of these two from among the rest. The aor. in sense of plup. appears in (1) sentences introduced by ‘when,’ ‘since,’ ‘until’ regularly; (2) in rel. and other subord. sentences often, (3) in principal sentences oceasionally.

26. ὁμαιχμία —used hy Herod. and late writers; the adj. ὅμαιχμος in iii. 58. 4.

27. διενεχθέντες —open war in 457 B.C., dispute in 461 B.C. See c. 102. ἐπολέμησαν —till the thirty years' truce 445 B.C. See c. 107.

4. ἤδη ἐχώρουν —now regularly joined these states—i e. entered the alliance of Athens or Sparta. Contrast the earlier state of affairs, c. 15. 2 οὐ γὰρ ξυνειστήκεσαν κτλ,

5. τὰ μὲν σπενδόμενοι —this should mean now making truces; but we certainly expect ‘being now at peace.’ In the previous sentences Thuc. has described the state of affairs (a) from the battle of Salamis to 457 B.C., (b) from 457 onwards. Now during period (a) Athens and Sparta were at peace; but from 466 disputes began between Athens and her allies. During period (b) Athens and Sparta might be said to be ‘making truces’ (450, 445 B C.) or making war. The ὥστε therefore seems to refer to what happened from 466 onwards; but ἀπὸ τῶν Μηδικῶν—the war with Xerxes to the battle of Plataea (or Mycale) does not agree with this. There is a want of precision in the passage.

7. εὖ παρεσκευάσαντο τὰ πολέμια —ef. Arist. Ath. Pol. 23 of the Athenians, συνέβη τὰ εὶς τὸν πόλεμον ἀσκῆσαι. τὰ πολέμια in the sense of τὰ πολεμικά is found in Herod. and Hippocrates; Xen. Anab. 1.6.1; Arist. Ath. Pol. c. 3 and 23 .

11. ἡγοῦντο —sc αὐτῶν.

κατ’ ὀλιγαρχίαν κτλ .—i.e. θεραπεύοντες δὲ ὅπως πολιτεύσουσι κατ’‐ὀλιγαρχίαν(κατά of mannei), ἐπιτηδείως σφίσιν αὐτοῖς μόνον (‘in their, the Lacedaemonian, interests alone’). Cf. Arist. Pol. 4.11 τῶν ἑν ἠγεμονίᾳ γενομένων τῆς Ἑλλάδος ... οἱ μὲν δημοκρατίας καθίστασαν, οἱ δ’ ὀλιγαρχίας, οὐ πρὸς τὸ τῶν πόλεων συμφέρον σκοποῦντες ἀλλὰ πρὸς τὸ σφέτερον αὐτῶν .

13. ναῦς τε τῶν πόλεων —having gradually taken over (assumed possession of) the ships of the various cities. Cf. c. 99. 3.

16. καὶ ἐγένετο αὐτοῖς —two widely different views are taken of this passage according as αὐτοῖς means (a) ‘the Athenians’ only or (b) ‘the Athenians and Lacedaemonians.’ Omitting minor differences, we get (a) ‘and so her own resources for carrying on this war reached a greater strength than (what she had) when she stood at the height of her prosperity side by side with the undamaged forces of her confederates’; i.e. Athens had appropriated the forces of her confederates, as it were, and thus was stronger than when she was at the head of a body of independent allies. (b) The forces of Athens and Sparta separately were stronger than they had been (both together) during the period of the ὁμαιχμία (Classen) or ‘stronger than the strongest power each separately had wielded with its still undamaged συμμαχία’ (Herbst). (a) accords with what Thuc afterwards says of the growth of Athenian power (cf. c. 118) By τὰ κράτιστα he means the time before the reduction of Naxos (466 B.C.). ξυμμαχία ἀκραιφνής is in contrast with the appropriation of ships and imposition of tribute. (b) with Classen's rendering is too strong; with Herbst, we certainly hardly feel the statement, as far as it refers to Sparta, consistent with the reference to her policy made above.

20. τὰ παλαιά —this, as Herbst and Steup point out, refers only to the time before the expulsion of the tyrants—see note on c. 1.2 τὰ γὰρ πρὸ αὐτῶν κτλ. The events of the Persian wars were fully known, and in c. 18. 1 Thuc. comes to them as to modern events. Therefore we must suppose cc. 18 and 19 to form a long parenthesis—see the analysis of the προοίμιον, Intr III. note.

τοιαῦτα —i.e. comparatively insignificant, οὐ μεγάλα.

χαλεπὰ ὄντα —though it is difficult to trust every piece of evidence as put forward in the traditions about them. This is the personal construction for χαλεπὸν ὂν παντὶ ἑξῆς τ. π. The clause is amplified in what follows, and does not refer to what has preceded. πᾶν ἑξῆς =‘every one without exception.’

22. ἀκοάς — accounts.

24. σφίσιν —the indirect reflexive, which, as regularly used in subord. sentences, refers to subject of principal sentence. But later writers generally use ἑαυτούς etc. as both indirect and direct reflex.

ὁμοίως —as events that did not occur in their own place.

25. γοῦν —cf. c. 2.5. Here ‘for example’ (? and there too).

Ἵππαρχον —there is a more detailed account of the matter in 6.54-59. Hdt. 5.55; Hdt. 6.123; Arist. Ath. Pol. c. 18. There are no discrepancies between this account and the statement of Herod. and Arist. (for the statement in the latter that Thessalus was half-brother of Hipparchus is not necessarily a contradiction of this); but there are several differences between the Aristotelian account and the longer account given in book vi.

1. ὑποτοπήσαντές τι —feeling some suspicion. (Some connect τί with μεμηνῦσθαι .) ὑποτοπῆσαι used by Thuc. only in aor. inf. or partic.

2. ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ καὶ π . with μεμηνῦσθαι, on that great day at the very moment, before they were to take action.

3. ἐκ ... μεμηνῦσθαι —the other places in Thuc. in which ε·κ practically=ὑπό are 2.49. 1; iii. 69. 1; v. 104; 6.36. 2. The use is Ionic, not found in Aristoph., and there are only doubtful traces of it in the orators.

5. πρὶν ξυλληφθῆναι ... κινδυνεῦσαι —wishing to do something before they were arrested (and) then to take their chance. πρὶν ξ. goes with δράσαντές τι, and καί=‘on that condition.’

7. περὶ τὸ Αεωκόρειον —ἐν μέσῳ τῷ Κεραμεικῷ (Harpocration), but inside the city. Meanwhile Hippias (according to 6.57) was marshalling the procession outside the gates. The Ath. Pol. however says that Hippias was awaiting the procession on the acropolis. The route of the procession was from the (outer) Ceramicus to the temple of Athcna Polias. As for the Leocorion, the story was that the three daughters of King Leos were sacrificed to Pallas to avert famine from Athens. The chapel is connected with the worship of Apollo as god of purification.

9. πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα —as regards; or (what comes to the same) οἴονται may be rendered ‘conceive.’

10. οὐ χρόνῳ ἀμνηστούμενα —le grec renforce souvent une idée positive en la reprenant sous forme négative (Chambry). Cf. p. 112 1. 16.

11. ὥσπερ κτλ .—Hdt. 6.57, if the kings are not present at a meeting of the Council, (κελεύουσἰτοὺς μάλιστά σφι τῶν γερόντων προσήκοντας ἔχειν τὰ τῶν βασιλέων γέρεα, δύο ψήφους τιθεμένους, τρίτην δὲ τὴν ἑωυτῶν. It may be that Thuc. is referring to that passage, and took it to imply that each king had two votes (though it is doubtful whether Herod. meant that). In ix. 53 Herod. mentions the λόχος Πιτανάτης as present at Plataea. It can hardly be doubted that Thuc. consciously includes Herod. among οἱ ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες. See Jebb, The Speeches of Thuc., in Hellenica, p. 273.

12. μιᾷ ψήφῳ —we expect the accus., as in Aesch. Eum. 738 ψῆφον δ’ Ὀρέστῃ τήνδ’ ἐγὼ προσθήσομαι, but the sense is ‘give their opinion (sc. γνώμην) with one vote.’ ( Eum. l.c. does not support the opinion of Classen and Steup that the use of the dat. is to be explained by the fact that the kings voted last.) The errors noted illustrate the difficulty of getting information about Spartan proceedings.

17. ἐκ ... τεκμηρίων with νομίξων. The object is (ἐκεῖνἀἃ διῆλθον, the pred. τοιαῦτα μάλιστἁεἶναι). The partic. νομίζων, πιστεύων, ἡγησάμενος are co-ordinate; but they express not condition, but means: lit. However, it is by considering the proofs I have given and in the light of them thinking that ... that one will escape error, and not by preferring to follow the embellishments and exaggerations of poets or the attractive but untrustworthy compositions of prose writers ... but by coming to the conclusion. Edd. generally represent the participles as conditional, but μήτε ... μήτε would then be required. See M.T. 835

20. ἐπὶ τό —so as to please the ear of the public rather than to arrive at the truth. The double compar. as regularly where two qualities in the same person or thing are contrasted: ἰὼ στρατηγοὶ πλέονες ἢ βελτίονες.

23. ὄντα —agreeing with the implied object of ξυνέθεσαν τὰ πολλά is in limiting apposition to this object, and αὐτῶν depends on τὰ πολλά.

24. ἀπίστως —so as to be incredible. This pregnant use of an adverb may often be noticed in the phrases with ἔχειν, διακεῖσθαι, διατιθέναι

ἐπὶ τὸ μυθῶδες ἐκνενικηκότα —generally rendered ‘have won their way into the region of the fabulous’: but Croiset explains ‘in which the fabulous character has ended by prevailing.’

26. ὡς παλαιὰ εἶναι —for the restrictive infin. see M.T. 781; ‘sufficiently considering their antiquity.’ The ‘plainest indications’ are the τεκμήρια of 21.1.

27. καὶ ὁ πόλεμος —Thuc. having ascertained, as clearly as is possible, the small importance of earlier undertakings, now returns to the Pel. War, which, to all who judge it in the light of the facts, will be found to have proved more important than they (τὰ παλαιά).

28. ἐν ᾦ — while

3. δηλώσει —with partic., as in 2.50 ἐδήλωσε ... ἄλλο τι ὄν. Cf. 5.9 δείξω οὐ παραινέσαι οἷός τε ὤν. Cf. Jebb on Soph. Ant. 20.

5. καὶ ὅσα μέν —after his reference to the importance of the war, Thuc. goes on to explain the manner in which he has dealt with it. ὅσα=‘as regards all that.

λόγῳ —Steup is probably right in explaining this, not as merely pleonastic, but as a reference to the set speeches, as distinct from ‘words’ generally: hence=‘in debate.’ Note, however, the implied contrast between τὰ ἔργα τῶν λεχθέντων and τὰ ἔργα τῶν πραχθέντων, deeds of speech and of act.

6. ἐν αὐτῷ —i.e. ἐν τῷ πολεμεῖν.

7. χαλεπόν —for the implied sense ‘impossible’ Steup compares c 20. 1; 7.87. 4

9. ὧν —rel. to τῶν λεχθέντων.

ἄλλοθέν ποθεν —from the various places where they happened to be

10. ὡς δ’ ἂν ἐδόκουν κτλ .—I have represented the various speakers as uttering the sentiments that seemed to me appropriate to the particular occasion, while I have kept as closely as possible to the general sense of what was really said: lit. as I believed that they would have best expressed what it was necessary to say. ἄν and μάλιστα belong to εἰπεῖν ˙ ἐχομένῳ κτλ. to εἴρηται, to which ἐμοί is supplied. The order is thus awkward, but it is made easier by the preceding ἐμοί. (The sense does not allow us to connect ἐχομένῳ with ἐδόκουν)

11. τὰ δέοντα —i.e. the best arguments that could be found to support the ξύμπασα γνώμη of the speaker. (Jebb, Hellenica p. 275, thinks that Thuc. is tacitly contrasting this method with that of Herod., and, as it can scarcely be doubted that he does so in the passage that follows, this is probably true.)

14. τὰ δ’ ἔργα τῶν πραχθέντων —verbally this is opposed to τὴν ἀκρίβειαν τῶν λεχθέντων rather than to ὅσα λόγῳ εἶπον.

16. ἠξίωσα —thought it my business.

οὐδ’ ὡς ἐμοὶ ἐδόκει —in accordance with my own whims.

17. οἷς τε αὐτὸς παρῆν —i.e. (ἠξίωσα γράφειν ἐκεῖνἀοἷς: I described facts which I myself witnessed and (I described facts) after inquiring about each detail from others, thus ἐπεξελθών is parallel to οἷς αὐτὸς παρῆν, which, as Mr. Forbes says, is equivalent to αὐτὸς παραγενόμενος. (Another way is to make ἐπεξελθών govern οἶς αὐτὸς παρῆν, but this has the great disadvantage of making οἷς αὐτὸς παρῆν and παρὰ τῶν ἄλλων parallel phrases. See crit. note.)

18. ὅσον δυνατὸν ἀκριβείᾳ —for ( τοσοῦτον)ὅσον (accus. δυνατὸν(ἦν)ἀ. Notice that ἀκριβείᾳ here is subjective in sense, meaning the aecuracy of Thuc, not the accuracy of the facts, as in 22.1 .

21. ἑκατέρων —towards either side, objective gen. to εὐνοίας, as in 7.57. 10 Ἀθηναίων εύνοίᾳ. (Croiset connects ἑκατέρων τις , ex utrisque partibus quisque. )

ὡς ... εὐνοίας ἢ μνήμης ἔχοι —for the gen., that of the sphere in which, depending on ὡς, πῶς, ποῦ, ποῖ, and occasionally other advs. of manner, cf c. 36. 2. ἔχοι is iterative.

23 τὸ μὴ μυθῶδες —the fact that he hears no legend in my history. μἥ is here subjective, referring to what the reader will feel (The edd., as frequently in Thuc., give various explanations of this μή.)

αὐτῶν —with τὸ μὴ μ.; cf. c. 1. 2 .

24. ἀτερπέστερον —less attractive.

25. τῶν γενομένων —this means the past so far as Thuc. records it, the period with which he deals; for Thuc. could not suppose that his work would be useful as a record of all past history.

τὸ σαφές —the truth, ‘the exact nature.’

26 τῶν μελλόντων κτλ .—of what is likely to be repeated at some future time with more or less exactness.

1. κρίνειν —subject τούτους. αὐτά —my history, as αὐτῶν above.

2. τε —concluding, ‘and so.’

ἀγώνισμα —the word means performance, ‘feat,’ ‘show piece,’ or ‘prize’; here of a prize composition.

ἐς τὸ παραχρῆμα ἀκούειν —for immediate hearing.

4. τῶν δὲ πρότερον —it is by this time shown that τὰ παλαιά (cc. 2-17) were unimportant as compared with the Pel. War. But there remains the war against Xerxes (τὸ Μηδικόν, see c. 18. 2, the μέγας στόλος); and to that Thuc. now passes.

5. δυοῖν ναυμαχίαιν καὶ πεζομαχίαιν —which battles were these? The Schol says Artemisium and Salamis; Thermopylae and Plataea. But it is difficult to see how Mycale could be left out, and owing to the indecisive character of Artemisium, it is likely that Thuc. did not mean to include it, and reckoned Mycale as a ναυμαχία .

7. τούτου δὲ τοῦ π .—it is not possible to say with certainty whether Thuc. alludes to the Ten Years' War, or the whole of the Pel. War.

μέγα —predicative.

8. ξυνηνέχθη —cf. c. 9. 2. This use also, with an infin., is frequent in Herod.

11. ὑπὸ βαρβάρων —if the Ten Years' War is meant, the only case mentioned by Thuc. is Colophon ( 3.34); but if the Twenty-seven Years' War be meant, Mycalessus (29) may be included, though ἠρημωθησαν is somewhat exaggerated.

ὑπὸ σφῶν αὐτῶν —as Plataea (3.68), Mytilene (3.50), Thyrea (4.57).

12. οἰκήτορας μετέβαλον —as Aegina (2.27), Potidaea (2.70), Anactorium (4.49), Scione (5.32), Delos ( 5.1), Melos (5.116 ).

13. φυγαί —sc. ἐγένοντο. Instances of exile as the direct consequence of the war are the Plataeans (2.5), driven out by the Thebans, the Lesbians, who fled before the Athenians (4.52); exile as the result of στάσις occurred at Corcyra ( 3.69), Megara (4.74).

15. τά τε πρότερον κτλ .—moreover what was formerly repeated on hearsay, but seldom confirmed by fact, now became credible, because men saw it all.

17. σεισμῶν τε πέρι ... ἡλίου τε ἐκλείψεις —the construction changes slightly. We might have had σεισμοί or περὶ ἐκλείψεων.

19. οἱ αὐτοί — moreover, emphasising ἰσχυρότατοι. Cf. the use of idem.

20. πυκνότεραι —of course Thuc. does not record all the strange things that befell μετὰ τοῦδε τοῦ πολέμου: e.g. he records no instances of αὐχμός or λιμός (for λιμοί evidently does not refer to hunger caused by siege). He records two eclipses of the sun, one in 431 B.C. (2.28), the other in 424 B.C. (4.52), but if the Ten Years' War be meant, three eclipses could have been observed in Greece; or it the Twenty-seven Years' War is alluded to, six. Of course it is not certain that all of the eclipses were actually observed; Thuc., as Mr. Forbes says, only gives the popular opinion.

παρὰ τά —as compared with; cf. 4.6 χειμὼν μείζων παρὰ τὴν καθεστηκυῖαν ὥραν .

23. καὶ ἡ ... ἡ νόσος —the art. is similarly repeated to throw emphasis on the second part of the phrase—the disease that ... I mean the pestilence—in c. 126. 4, and in several other instances. With νόσος most edd. supply ἐγένετο: but Steup rightly says οὐκ ἄπιστος κατέστη, for when Thuc. describes the plague in 2.47, he expressly says that ‘it was said that it had broken out in several other places previously’ to 430 B.C.

μέρος τι —object of φθείρασα, sc. τῆς Ἑλλάδος, a great number of the Greeks.

26. ἤρξαντο δέ —the narrative of the war begins at the opening of Bk. ii., the remainder of this book being occupied with the αἰτίαι καὶ διαφοραί. The main emphasis is on λύσαντες κτλ.; the date of the recovery of Euboea is 445 B.C. (c. 115 ).

29. τὰς αἰτίας ... καὶ τὰς διαφοράς —these are again denoted by ἡ ἀληθεστάτη πρόφασις and αἱ ... αἰτίαι in 23.6.

3. τὴν μὲν γὰρ κτλ —apparently τὴν ... λόγῳ is attributive predicate to τοὺς Ἀθηναίους ... ἀναγκάσαι, as Classen explains, lit. As for the truest motive ... I think that the A... . forced etc. The assumption of a ‘confnsion of construction’ (Kiuger) seems unnecessary. Chambry explains τὴν ἀ. πρόφασιν τοὺς Ἀθηναίους ἡγοῦμαι ... καἳἡγοῦμαι) ... ἀναγκάσαι, so that ἡγοῦμαι has two objects differently expressed, but γιγνομένους and παρέχοντας can scarcely be separated.

4. πρόφασιν —of the actual motive, as in 6.6, and now and then in other authors. When so used it seems to denote the motive as it appears to the mind of the writer as distinct from the motive as put forward by the doer.

5. μεγάλους γιγνομένους —in c. 118 Thuc. says that the Athenians during the period between the foundation of the Delian Confederacy and the war (the Pentecontaetia) ἐπὶ μέγα ἐχώρησαν δυνάμεως. We might, therefore, look for μείζους ἀεί in place of μεγάλους, but, as this is the first mention of Atheman power, the pos. is quite natural. This growing greatness of A. is described in cc. 88-118; αι· ... λ. αἰτίαι occupy cc. 24-87.

11. Ἐ. ἐστι πόλις —there is a city named E.

ἐσπλέοντι —dat. of the ‘person judging,’ frequent in Thuc. The direct accus. instead of ἐς after ἐσπλεῖν is poetical, and occurs nowhere else in prose.

12. Ἰόνιον —the Adriatic.

16. Κορίνθιος —when a city that was a colony founded a colony in turn, it was usual to choose a founder from the original mother-city.

τῶν ἀφ’ Ἡ . depends on Φαλίος, of the family of the Heraclidae.

21. δύναμις —see crit. note. The gloss πόλις is, of course, due to πολυάνθρωπος. An obvious change would be δύναμις μ. καὶ <πόλις > πολυάνθρωπος, but δύναμις πολυάνθρωπος is surely a possible phrase, as δύναμις denotes military power: cf. 33. 2 αὕτἡἡ δύναμις)πάρεστιν αὐτεπάγγελτος.

23. ἀπὸ πολέμου ... ἐφθάρησαν —in consequence of a war with ... they became crippled.

24. τῆς δυνάμεως depends on τῆς πολλῆς, i.e. the idiom ἡ πολλὴ τῆς δ. is used.

25. τὰ δὲ τελευταῖα ... πολέμου —in the period immediately preceding this war.

1. ἐπελθόντες —this conjecture seems required, since with ἀπελθόντες (‘the departed exiles’) we miss a circumstantial partic. to ἐλῄζοντο.

7. περιορᾶν φθειρομένους —in c. 35. 4 περιορῶ with infin. With infin. περιορῶ occurs only in Herod. and Thuc., and =ἐῶ: with partic. (pres. or aor. with different shade of meaning)=‘look on’ with indifference.

15. ἐν ἀπόρῳ εἴχοντο —ἔχεσθαι ἐν πολλῇ ἀπορίᾳ occurs in Antiphon v. 16, Lys. xiii. 11 ; εἶναι ἐν ἀπόρῳ Thuc. 3.22. The ordinary phrase is ἐν(πολλᾖἀπορίᾳ εἶναι.

16. θέσθαι τὸ παρόν —how to arrange the matter.

18. εἰ παραδοῖεν —oblique for the delib. subjunct.

19. τιμωρίαν τινὰ ποιεῖσθαι —cf. c. 5. 1, ‘obtain help’; but the words would naturally mean to bring help (the idiom with ποιεῖσθαι). In 6.60, however, ἄδειαν ποιεῖσθαι means to obtain immunity.

20. αὐτοῖς —the Corinthians, depending on παραδοῦναι .

24. σφῶν —here, and frequently in Herod. and Thuc., as direct reflexive, referring to the subject of the same clause.

27. κατά τε τὸ δίκαιον —this does not mean as was right, but that τὸ δίκαιον was the motive put forward by the Corinthians; i.e. τὸ δίκαιον has its rhetorical use, and the plea may be illustrated by the saying συγγνώμη ἀδελφῷ βοηθεῖν.

2. ἅμα δὲ καί —for the δέ following τε cf. c. 11. 1.

4. οὔτε γάρ —the verb is ἔπεμπον (c. 26. 1), but, owing to the length of the sentence, the construction is changed (anacoluthon), and instead of οι· Κερκυραῖοι being the subject of the verb, a new subject, οἱ Κορίνθιοι, is introduced. The outline of the sentence is as follows: 1. (a) οὔτε ... νομιζόμενα, (b) οὔτε ... ἀποικίαι: 2. περιφρονοῦντες δέ, (a) καὶ (‘both’) ... πλουσιωτάτοις, (b) καὶ ... δυνατώτεροι, (c) ναυτικῷ δὲ ... ἐπαιρόμενοι, etc.

4. ἐν πανηγύρεσι ταῖς κοιναῖς —festivals common to Corinth and Corcyra.

5. γέρα —the schol. rather vaguely says τὰς τιμὰς καὶ προεδρίας. The corresponding passage in Diodorus says that the Corcyraeans neglected to send animals for sacrifice.

6. Κορινθίῳ ἀνδρὶ ... ἱερῶν —Hdt. 6.81 (Cleomenes of Sparta at Argos) Xen. Hell. 3.4 (Agesilaus of Sparta at Aulis) allude to the fact that a ξένος could not offer sacrifice in a strange city without permission. Dittenberger shows that προκατάρχεσθαι is equivalent to προθύειν (cf. Syl. Ins. Gr. 323 and 358): certain ceremonies took place before a victim was killed for sacrifice (Gardner and Jevons, p. 250), and these ceremonies had to be performed by a citizen of the place. The Corcyraeans would not perform them for Corinthians, and thus prevented the latter from sacrificing in Corcyra. Thuc. uses προκατάρχεσθαι here for the usual κατάρχεσθαι .

8. καὶ χρημάτων κτλ .—partly because the power that money gave them put them on a level with the richest of the Greeks. By ‘the richest of the Greeks’ the Corinthians themselves are meant. There is some exaggeration, no doubt, for the Athenians were actually among the richest; but the wealth of Corinth had become a tradition (see c. 13). ὁμοία ὄντες is not possible (see crit. note), and δυνατοί cannot be supplied with Herbst from δυνατώτεροι. <ἐν > δυνάμει ... ὁμοίᾳ or δυνάμει ... ὁμοῖοι would give the required sense with a proper construction, but no correction is certain.

12. προύχειν —ἐπαίρομαι is found only here with infin.= ‘boast.’

ἔστιν ὅτε —with καὶ κατὰ κτλ., sometimes even on the ground that the Phaeacians, who were famous for seamanship, had dwelt in Corcyra before them. The Greeks identified Corcyra with the Scheria of the Odyssey. For the naval reputation of the Phaeacians see Od. vii. 34-39, where they are called ναυσικλυτοί.

14. ᾗ καί —this circumstance (that they were proud of the reputation of the Phaeacians) led them to. καί =‘and in fact.’

15. οὐκ ἀδύνατοι , meiosis for δυνατώτατοι .

18. ἔπεμπον — sent, the imperf. being frequently used with πέμπω and other verbs—κελεύω, δέομαι etc.—where we look for aor. Perhaps it is because it takes time to deliver the message.

20. καὶ Ἀμπρακιωτῶν —with φρουρούς.

22. Ἀπολλωνίαν —now the ruins of Pollina, S. of Durazzo.

2. καὶ ὕστερον —in eontrast with εὐθύς. The ἕτερος στόλος seems to anticipate ἀλλὰ στρατεύουσιν κτλ. in 26.4; but the edd. explain with Poppo, that this new force consisted of fifteen ships (hence forty below, cf. c. 29. 4). But στρατεύουσιν ἐπ’ αὐτούς should not allude to a hostile move made by the twenty-five ships already on the spot (the rendering ‘assume the offensive’ being madmissible): they should refer only to the new force sent from home.

3. κατ’ ἐπήρειαν —in a threatening manner, with ἐκέλευον .

6. ἀποδεικνύντες —cf. c. 25. 2, ‘calling their attention to graves (of their common ancestors buried at Corcyra) and ties of blood, to which they appealed.’ ἥν applies equally to both nouns, but is attracted to the nearer.

9. αὐτῶν —neut., with οὐδέν, the demands.

10. ἀλλὰ στρατεύουσιν —parataxis, the sense being, ‘but, instead of the E. listening to their demands, the C.’

14. προεῖπον combines public ‘summons’ with ‘notice’; Herod. 2.33; vii. 149. Infins. of different kinds are combined also with λέγω and γιγνώσκω .

18. αὐτοῖς —see on c. 13. 3.

22. ἐπὶ τῇ ... ἰέναι —epexegesis of ἀποικίαν, and governed by ἐκήρυσσον. For the dat. fem. in adverbial phrase cf. c. 15. 2. The new colonies were to have equal rights with the old.

24. ἐθέλει ... βούλεται —if ἐθέλοι is right, the two moods are combined in O.O.; ἐθέλοι represents ἐθέλει of recta, and there is no change of meaning. It should be noticed that the Laurentian gives ἐθέλει: for the change of indic. after εἰ to optat. is rare, but occurs occasionally, as in Lys. vii. 34 προσῆλθον λέγων ὅτι ... ἕτοιμός εἰμι, εἴ τινα βούλοιτο (=βούλει), παραδοῦναι. In Thuc. 8.89. 3 εἰ μὴ ἤκοιεν represents εἰ μὴ ἥκουσι .

26. Κορινθίας —the Cor. drachma was about two-thirds of the value of the Attic.

μένειν —oblique for μενέτω.

4. Κεφαλλήνων — partitive; there were four πόλεις in Cephallenia, of which Pale was one.

9. κενάς —sc. ἀνδρῶν.

15. παρέλαβον — ‘had taken with them,’ to support the request There is no difficulty in supposing that Sparta and Sicyon were ready to lend their voice to a request that Corinth should withdraw the new settlers. These οἰκήτορες must have appropriated the property of the exiled Corcyraean oligarchs; and the proceeding of Corinth was in this respect high-handed. The sending of the πρέσβεις did not commit Sparta to anything.

18. ἀντιποιοῦνται —sc. Ἐπιδάμνου.

δίκας δοῦναι —submit the case to arbitration. δ. διδόναι καὶ δέχεσθαι is a technical phrase for legal arbitration between states as opposed to war: cf. vii. 18 ὅπλα μὴ ἐπιφέρειν ἢν δίκας ἐθέλωσι διδόναι.

19. αἷς ἂν κτλ = παρ’ αἷς ἂν δίκας δοῦναι ἀ. ξ.

21. κρατεῖν —sc. ἤθελον.

ἤθελον δέ —an alternative suggestion to submit the decision to Apollo.

22. πόλεμον δὲ κτλ. —but they charged them not to cause a war. Notice the difference between πόλεμον ποιῶ and π. ποιοῦμαι.

23. εἰ δὲ μή — M.T. 478. καὶ αὐτοί —they in turn. The elaborate wording of the allusion to Athens is intended to mark the earnestness and reluctance of the Corcyraeans.

24. ἐκείνων βιαζομένων —if the Corinthians forced them.

25. ἑτέρους τῶν νῦν —gen. of comparison; Xen. Mem. 4.4. 25 ἄλλα τῶν δικαίων. So Lat. alius occasionally has abl. τῶν νῦν ὄντων means the Peloponnesians whose confederacy Corcyra threatens to leave. μᾶλλον goes with φίλους ποιεῖσθαι, sooner than agree to the demand of Corinth.

26. ὠφελίας ἕνεκα —in self-defence.

1. πρότερον δ’ κτλ. — equivalent to οὐ καλῶς ἔχειν πρότερον αὐτούς (the Corinthians and Corcyraeans) δικάζεσθαι, πολιορκουμένων τῶν Ἐπιδαμνίων, but the logic of the sentence is sacrificed to a verbal antithesis.

4. ταῦτα —i.e. withdraw the ships and the Illyrians.

ἑτοῖμοι δὲ εἶναι —Krüger supplies δικαζεσθαι, and ὥστε then =‘on the understanding that’; but this is not very satisfactory after ποιήσειν ταῦτα has intervened. Bohme and others make μένειν depend on ἑτοῖμοι εἷναι, with ὥστε pleonastic; and for this ἱκανὸς ὥστε is cited from Plat. Protag 338 c. In either case the sense is the same; they were prepared to agree that besiegers and besieged should stay as they were and make a truce until the arbitration was concluded. ποιήσασθαι is co-ordinate with μένειν . (Mr. Forbes supplies ποιεῖν ταῦτα to ἑτοῖμοι εἶναι: but ποιεῖν ταῦτα cannot= δικάζεσθαι, for in that case the second proposal of the Coreyraeans, ἢν καὶ ἐκεῖνοι κτλ., is a less conciliatory suggestion than their original proposal, 28.2.)

9. προπέμψαντες ... πρότερον —pleonasm, as in c. 23. 5.

11. ἑβδομήκοντα καὶ πέντε —the numbers given in c. 27. 2 amount to 68, but to these are to be added the νῆες κεναί from Elis.

δισχιλίοις —the number is puzzling, as in c. 27. 2 the Cor. are said to be pieparing to send 3000.

12. ἐπί — for, not ‘against.’ ἐναντία , internal accus, as adv.; cf. c. 6. 6 .

19. τὸ ἱερὸν Ἀπόλλωνος —the celebrated temple of Ἀπόλλων Ἄκτιος, best known to us from its connexion with the battle of Actium.

21. προύπεμψαν —before taking hostile action.

23. ζεύξαντες —probably this means that they inserted new cross-beams, called ζυγώματα or ζυγά, connecting one side of the ship with the other. (The ζυγώματα. however, may be ribs, σταμῖνες.) This has nothing to do with undergirding, which, as Mr. Forbes says, would be ζώσαντες.

24. ἐπισκευάσαντες —overhauled to see if repairs were needed.

27. τεσσαράκοντα —see c. 25. 4 .

2. παρὰ πολύ —always with a word implying comparison; cf. παρὰ πολὺ ἡσσηθέντες 2.89. 3 .

6. παραστήσασθαι —sc. τὴν Ἐπίδαμνον.

ὥστε =ἐφ) ᾧτε|. ἐπήλυδας —the οἰκήτορες of c. 26. 1.

10. Λευκίμμῃ — Leukimo, SE. of Corcyra, near which the battle was doubtless fought.

11. ἄλλους —those taken in the sea-fight.

18. τῆς γῆς —partitive.

20. τοῦ τε χρόνου τὸν πλεῖστον —with μέχρι οὗ, most of the time they were controlling the sea and plundering the allies, ‘until.’ (Classen and Herbst understand by ὸ χρόνος the remainder of the campaigning season, but, without any qualification of χρόνος, this is surely impossible.) Of course the time intended must depend on the meaning of περιόντι τῷ θέρει, for which see next note. Thuc. means that the Corcyraeans did not keep their fleet at sea all the time between the departure of the Corinthian fleet and its reappearance.

24. περιιόντι τῷ θέρει —περιόντι, being the reading of all MSS, may be accepted. If περιεῖναι is intended, the explanation offered (Ullrich and others) is in ‘the remaining part of the summer.’ Herbst supports this rendering with ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ θέρει τελευτῶντι etc. (see the passages quoted by Mr. Forbes). But τῷ θέρει τελευτῶντι means in the summer when it was ending; and περιόντι τῷ θέρει=‘in the summer when it was (all) remaining over,’ the predicative partic., as Kruger says, modifying the whole sphere covered by the sense of the noun (cf. Bloomfield's note): this cannot yield the sense ‘in the remaining part of the summer.’ περιόντι must therefore be referred to περιιέναι, Aeolic elision. Examples of this elision of the ι of περί are Aesch Ag. 1145 περέβαλον, Eum. 634 περεσκήνωσεν, and περιών is frequently given in MSS. for περιιών. In Xen. Hell. 3.2. 25 the best MS. has περιόντι τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ. This means during the summer when it was coming round to autumn, drawing to a close. Steup and others, following the Schol. ἐνισταμένῳ, understand ‘when the summer came round’ to mean, when the next summer came; but this does not square so well with the concluding words of the chapter, which seem to refer to the winter of the year in which the battle was fought. If ‘drawing to a close’ is the meaning, then the dates would be:

Battle of Leucimme (c. 29. 4), ... Spring 435.

Return of Corinthian fleet (c. 30. 3), Autumn 435.

Corinthian preparations (c. 31. 1). Summer 435-33.

If, however, the sense is ‘when the next summer came,’ the first two dates should be altered to summer 435, and spring 434. (Remember that ‘summer’ in Thuc. includes spring and autumn.) In either case the calculations are based on the date of the battle of Sybota, for which see c. 51.

25. σφῶν —see c. 25. 2.

5. τὸ θέρος τοῦτο —i.e. for what was left of the campaigning season of 435. (If περιόντι applies to the next summer, then the whole summer of 434 would be meant.)

9. ὀργῇ φέροντες —excited by the war, ὀργή being ‘passion, excitement, impulse,’ as well as anger. It is the ‘war fever’ that Thuc. means.

11. τὰ κράτιστα —cf. c. 19, end.

12. ἔκ τε αὐτῆς κτλ .—ἐρέτας is object of ἀγείροντες, to which μισθῷ πείθοντες is subordinate. Steup, however, supplies ναῦς to ἀγείροντες, and makes μ. πείθοντες co-ordinate with ἀγείροντες. He joins τῆς ἄλλης Ἐ. ἐρέτας together (‘rowers belonging to other parts of Greece’). With the ordinary construction, supply ἐκ before τῆς.

16. ἔνσπονδοι =ξύμμαχοι . ἐσεγράψαντο —causal mid.

19. γενέσθαι —dependent on πειρᾶσθαι. Under the terms of the treaty the ἄγραφοι πόλεις might seek the alliance of either Athens or Sparta; but of course the request might be refused.

20. ὠφελίαν =βοήθειαν.

22. πρεσβευσόμενοι —to negotiate with them. The mid. seems to express reciprocity, and the word is rather loosely used.

24. προσγενόμενον —trans. ‘the addition of their fleet to ...,’ the chief emphasis being on the partic.

25. θέσθαι —as in c 25. 1.

26. ἐς ἀντιλογίαν ἦλθον —cf. εἰς λόγους ἐλθεῖν τινι.

28. εὐεργεσίας ... προυφειλομένης — ‘without having a elaim through some great serviee rendered or through a previously existing alliance.’ The meaning is simply ‘we cannot urge that we are seeking to renew an old ξυμμαχία or that we have a claim on you for services rendered.’ ‘We are not εὐεργέται of Athens’: for this see on c. 137. 4 καί μοι εὐεργεσία ὀφείλεται and c. 128. 4.

2. τοὺς πέλας — others.

4. πρῶτον —answered by ἔπειτα δέ.

5. ξύμφορα —internal accus.=ξύμφορον δέησιν.

7. βέβαιον —(cf. c. 2) pred., ‘unfailing.’

εἰ ... καταστήσουσι —if they do not propose to ... .

9. μετά — while or ‘besides,’ a characteristic substitute for μετὰ τοῦ τὴν ξυμμαχίαν αἰτεῖν.

12. τετύχηκε δὲ κτλ —lit. it has turned out that the same conduct not only involves us in inconsistency in our dealing with you, as regards the request we make, but is also disadvantageous (to us) in respect of our own position at the present time; i.e. beeause we have hitherto abstained from entering your alliance it is inconsistent to be seeking it now, and for the same reason we are now in danger. To ἄλογον and ἀξύμφορον supply ὄν, which is often omitted with τυγχάνω, φαίνομαι, διατελῶ, and occasionally with other verbs; cf. c. 34 end.

16. ἑκούσιοι — ‘having deliberately avoided all alliances’ (not ‘having entered into no alliance, if we could help it’). The strained position of ἑκούσιοι, and other words, throws special emphasis on the different parts of the clause. This statement is referred to by the Corinthian at c. 37. 2 ξιμμαχίαν οὐδενός πω δέξασθαι.

18. Κορινθίων —with πόλεμον ; cf. θεῶν πόλεμος, θεῶν ὅρκος, oath by the gods.

δῑ αὐτό —on that account, a favourite use of αὐτό and αὐτά with Thuc.

19. περιέστηκεν ... φαινομένη —what formerly seemed discretion in us ... has now on the eontrary proved clearly to be want of foresight and weakness. The partic. with περιεστάναι as in the eonstruction τυγχάνει οὖσα. But cf. c. 120. 5.

20. τῇ ... γνώμῃ —with ξυγ. , to share the risks of another's policy.

22. τὴν ... ναυμαχίαν —internal accus.

23. κατὰ μόνας —perhaps δυνάμεις is the subst, omitted in this phrase=‘unaided.’

28. μέγας —sc. ἔσται ἡμῖν.

1. μὴ μετὰ κακίας κτλ. —not maliciously, but because we were mistaken in our policy, we boldly act in a manner inconsistent with our former inactivity. There is nothing mean in seeking an alliance now for the first time when we are in danger: we were mistaken in not seeking it before.

4. ἡ ξυντυχία ... τῆς ἡ. χρείας —lit. the coincidence of our request, i.e. ‘our request, coming at such a moment.’

10. ὡς ἂν μάλιστα ... μαρτυρίου —se. καταθεῖσθε, lit. as you would most with a record never forgotten, i.e. ‘in the manner most certain to be remembered for ever by us.’

11. καταθήσεσθε —necessary correction of καταθῆσθε, will confer the favour on us. The met. is from investment of money. Cf. c. 128. 4.

12. ναυτικόν τε still depends on ὅτι.

15. καὶ (πρὸ πολλῆς) χάριτος —i.e. your gratitude would have been great even if you could only have gained this aceession of power for a large sum. Isocr. 13, 11; Dem. pro. 33.

16. δύναμιν —a power (powerful state), to be translated as subject of πάρεστιν.

18. φέρουσα ἐς —producing in the minds of others an impression of generosity, a feeling of gratitude in those whom ... . Notice the use of ἀρετή here.

23. ἀσφάλειαν —referring to ἰσχύν: κόσμον referring to ἀρετὴν καὶ χάριν .

1. ὑμετέρῳ —of you.

2. δυναμένους —Stahl takes this and ὄντας in apposition to Κορινθίους, and removes the second καί so that only προκαταλαμβάνοντας depends on αἰσθάνεται. It is better with Steup to render the first καί both, and to make ὄντας also depend on αἰσθάνεται: ‘and are preparing by trying to subdue us for an attack on you.’

5. κατ· αὐτοὺς ... στῶμεν —confront them.

δυοῖν φθάσαι ἁμάρτωσιν —(1) ‘may not lose two things’ means may secure one or the other: hence ἢ ... ἤ following. (2) But the construction of φθάσαι and δυοῖν is doubtful. Taking δυοῖν dependent on ἁμάρτωσιν, as in Andoc. 1.20 δυοῖν τοῖν μεγίστοιν κακοῖν οὐκ ἦν αὐτῷ ἁμαρτεῖν, most cdd. make φθάσαι epexegetic, to gain them before (we make alliance). The order is against this, and φθάσαι should then=to gain one of them. It has been proposed to remove φθάσαι; but it is best, with Croiset, to take δυοῖν as dat.=‘fail to be beforehand with two things.’ Either they will inflict a disastrous defeat on Corcyra, or frighten her into joining themselves.

8. διδόντων — offering, as frequently.

9. προεπιβουλεύειν ... ἀντεπιβουλεύειν — the jingle called paronomasia, to which Thuc. is partial; e.g. 6.76 οὐκ ἀξυνετωτέρου κακοξυνετωτέρου δέ.

16. ἐκπέμπονται —sc. οἱ ἄποικοι, from πᾶσα ἀποικία .

17. προκληθέντες —see c. 28. 2 .

19. τῷ ἴσῳ —τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τῷ δικαίῳ, παρ’ οἶς ἡ ἰσότης (Schol.).

τὰ ἐγκλήματα μετελθεῖν —like δίκην μέτειμι, enforce their claims.

21. ὥστε —for the construction cf. c. 49. 7; 129. 3.

22. ἐκ τοῦ εὐθέος —in a straightforward way, with δεομένοις.

25. λαμβάνων —the same use with subst. referring to the feelings, c. 77. 6; cf. 2.64 τὸ ἐπίφθονον λαμβάνειν.

27. μηδετέρων —on account of the subjective sense given by δεχόμενοι—it is from the Lac. point of view.

28. εἴρηται —there is a clause in the thirty years' truce.

1. ἀρέσκηται —sc. ἐλθεῖν, mid., not as in c. 129 τοῖς λόγοις ἀρέσκομαι. The use of the mid. is Ionic.

5. προκειμένης —open to all.

7. εἶτα —and actually as a climax of arrogance an object if you help us.

9. ἐν αἰτίᾳ ἔχειν—a frequent idiom in Thuc. (Kr., followed by Steup, reads ὠφελίας εἴ τε ἐν ... δεόμεθα, πολὺ δή κτλ.)

11. οὐχ ὅπως —so far from.

14. περιόψεσθε —in sense= ἐάσετε, hence the infin. With the partic. περιορᾶν=to overlook what actually occurs; 1.24.6.

ἥν —sc. δύναμιν προσλαβεῖν αὐτοὺς περιιδεῖν.

ἀλλ) —sc. δίκαιόν ἐστι.

15. κἀκείνων ... καὶ ἡμῖν —i.e. stop them too from getting help, if you will not help us, or help us too if you let them ‘help themselves’ from your empire. κωλύω with a pers. object and without infin., ‘stop the mercenaries they draw,’ is not common; Eur. frag. 1041 Nauck οἰκοφθόρον γὰρ ἄνδρα κωλύει γυνὴ ἐσθλή .

16. πέμπειν ὠφελίαν —means send aid without concluding a formal alliance: βοηθεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ π. δεξαμένους=‘openly receive us into alliance and so help us.’

19. ὑπείπομεν — ‘suggested.’ The ref. is to c. 33. 1 γενήσεται καλὴ ἠ ξυντυχία κατὰ πολλά.

20. μέγιστον —sc. τὸ ξυμφέρον ἀποδείκνυμεν. We have the same powerful enemies as you have; and that is a great advantage to you, because it will bind us to you.

21. ἦσαν —are, as we saw; the didactio imperf.; but the word is prob. spurious, because (1) this use of the imperf. is not made out for the speeches of Thuc.: (2) we cannot supply ἦσαν to what follows—οὖτοι ... βλάψαι—but require εἰσίν, since nothing has been said to suggest that.

23. τοὺς μεταστάντας —those who shall have abandoned your alliance. This seems more probable than the rendering ‘those who have abandoned them (Corinth),’ as the mothercity. Athens may feel that Corcyra would be afraid to abandon the alliance with her.

24. οὐχ ὁμοία ἡ ἀλλοτρίωσις —Classen and others understand ‘the rejection of it is not the same thing (as if it were a continental alliance),’ i.e is more dangerous to you. Stahl, Steup and others: to estrange us is not a matter of indifference to you, which accounts better for the ἀλλά following: ‘but you should make friends with a naval power if you cannot prevent its existence.’

26. ἐᾶν ... ἔχειν —infin. in imperative sense. (Some think δεῖ is lost before εἰ δὲ μή.)

2. φοβεῖται δέ —supply ὅστις as subject, but it is usual to omit the second rel. in Greek in such a case.

3. τὰς σπονδὰς λύσῃ —i.e. if he has not been convinced by what we have said on this point; see c. 35. 1. Legally, the speaker has already explained, there will be no breach of the truce; but the alliance might be considered by Corinth as a breach of its spirit.

4. τὸ δεδιός —a favourite construction of Thuc. 2.59. 3 τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γνώμης: below c. 84. 6; τὸ μέλλον 90. 2; 142. 8. The neut. partic. with art. as noun is rarely used by other prose authors: Xen. Cyr. IV. v. 39 τὸ ἐλλεῖπον .

ἰσχὺν ἔχον —as the result of alliance with us.

5. μὴ δεξαμένου —if he rejects our request.

7. ἀδεέστερον —less formidable: here in passive sense. Cf. the double meaning of φοβερός, formidolosus.

οὐ ... τὸ πλέον =ἦσσον.

10. ἐς τὸν ... ἐνδοιάζῃ κτλ. —hesitates to secure for her in view of the war ... a place which beeomes friend or enemy with most important consequences to you (in either case).

13. τῆς ... Σικελίας depends on παράπλου, the coasting voyage to I. and S., Corcyra being the half-way house when the ordinary route to Sicily and Lower (Greek) Italy was taken —viz. round the coast of Peloponnese and to Corcyra and thence across. The gen. παράπλου depends on καλῶς in the phrase καλῶς κεῖται constructed on the analogy of καλῶς ἔχει, ὡς ἔχει (e.g. c. 22. 3 )etc.

16. ἐπελθεῖν —generally go to attack, here to help. Sparta hoped for sueh help from the west.

τό τε ἐνθένδε —a fleet going from Athens to Italy or Sicily. This passage was prob. written by Thuc. later in the war, when Athens had sent out such fleets via Coreyra.

18. βραχυτάτῳ κτλ. — ‘this is the briefest summary, including the whole situation and the details, by which ...’ τοῖς τε ξύμπασι καὶ καθ’ ἕκαστον is taken by Classen as adverbial =‘on the whole as well as in detail,’ but there is no parallel for the phrase in dative. It is awkward, but better, to make it apposition to κεφαλαίῳ (Kiuger). It is true that only one general matter is presently referred to (viz. the naval strength of Corcyra), so that τὰ καθ’ ἕκαστον seem wanting (Stahl); but the speaker means if you think out this summary, you will find it includes all detailed arguments too. If we look at the ξυμφέροντα to Athens that are brought forward in this speech, we shall notice (1) that the speaker in each case leads up to the fleet of Corcyra as the crowning argument, (2) that he is well aware that this is the argument that will really impress Athens. It is therefore right to insist on it at the end. κεφάλαιον means summary of the points previously raised. Edd. seem to overlook the fact that this passage is rhetorical, and not necessarily strictly accurate. (The remedy proposed is to make τοῖς ... ἕκαστον masc., either as dat. commodi depending on β. κεφαλαίῳ (Poppo, Steup) or placed after or before ξυμφορώτατόν ἐστι.)

20. τρία μέν —sc. ἐστί: ὄντα belongs to λόγου ἄξια. (There is no anacoluthon here.)

26. πλείοσι κτλ. —‘with our ships in addition (to yours). For this use of πλείων cf. e.g. Aesch. Ag. 755 τὸ δυσσεβὲς γὰρ ἔργον ... πλείονα τίκτει. (To take ταῖς ἡμετέραις as dat. of measure dependent on πλείοσι gives an ugly construction.)

3. ὡς καί for καὶ ὡς, unless καί is due to dittography (ὡς and καί are sometimes confused in MSS.). The parallels quoted, like 2.44 ὅ τι ἄξιον καὶ εἰπεῖν, are not close. (Steup thinks that after καί a clause is lost in which one of the two topics summed up in ἀμφοτέρων was expressed.)

5. ἀμφοτέρων —strictly τὸ ἡμᾶς ἀδικεῖν and τὸ αὐτοὺς πολεμοῦσθαι are but one topic differently expressed, and the two aspects of the matter are not clearly distinguished in what follows.

6. οὕτω —like tum demum.

7. ἀξίωσιν — claim.

8. μὴ ἀλογίστως —together as one word.

10. τὸ δέ —but that. τό being demonstrative in sense.

11. ἀρετῇ —either depending on ἐπί, or perhaps rather causal dat. ἀρετή means τὸ σῶφρον: cf. c. 32. 4 .

ξύμμαχόν τε —we have here the only example of τε followed by οὔτε (before παρακαλοῦντες. οὔτε ... τε is common): ‘wishing to have no ally in their nefarious schemes (persecuting their neighbours) or witness ( οὐδέ does not mean not even here as Mr. Forbes supposes), and to avoid exposing themselves to shame by asking others to aid them (in such schemes).’ The simplest change proposed is to alter οὐδέ to οὔτε (Weil), so that τε would co-ordinate βουλόμενοι to ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ καὶ οὐκ ἀρετῇ and οὔτε μ. ἔχειν=‘neither to have any ally as a witness in their schemes nor to ...’

15. αὐτάρκη θέσιν — internal accus.: the meaning is presently explained in διὰ τὸ κτλ.

16. παρέχει αὐτοὺς κτλ. —makes them judges of the wrongs they inflict more than (they would be) if they were hampered by treaties. With μᾶλλον ἤ κατά, more than accords with, cf. c. 76. 3: 2.50 χαλεπωτέρως ἢ κατὰ τὴν ἀνθρωπείαν φύσιν. (γίγνεσθαι does not belong to the phrase, but to δικαστάς only.)

δικαστάς —the meaning is that a citizen of another state who went to law with a Corcyrean must proceed as a ξένος in the Corcyrean courts: Corcyra does not experience a similar difficulty, whether real or assumed, because her citizens do not need to have dealings with other states to anything like the same extent. Corcyra was, of course, the port of call for all vessels passing to and from the west by the ‘coasting’ route; but the grievance based on this fact is surely exaggerated here.

18. ἐκπλέοντας agrees with ‘the Corcyreans’: others when at sea ἀνάγκῃ καταίρουσι to Corcyra.

20. καὶ τοῦτο κτλ. —the speaker now alludes to disputes between Corcyra and another state (meaning Corinth). ἐν τούτῳ, this being their conduct (see crit. note), is not right, because the argument shifts here to a new point.

τὸ εὐπρεπὲς ἄσπονδον —cf. e.g. 6.34 τὸ ξυνηθὲς ἥσυχον.

21. προβέβληνται —as a shield or cloak to cover their ἀδικία.

22. καὶ ὅπως —this explains κατὰ μόνας ἀδικῶσι, and means whether they make unrighteous gains by force or by deceit— these two ways are summed up in ἢν ... προσλάβωσιν—they feel no shame, because there is no witness.

25. καίτοι —the sentence that follows refers to both the grievances just alleged.

26. ἀληπτότεροι ἦσαν —the imperf. by assimilation to the other verbs. έξῆν is, of course, potential according to Goodwin, M.T. 415. ἀληπτότεροι because of their αὐτάρκης θέσις .

1. διδοῦσι καὶ δεχομένοις τὰ δ. —Corcyra had offered δίκας in this case (c. 28. 2); but the Corinthian means that they would not enter into an alliance, a condition of which was regularly the settlement of disputes by arbitration.

4. διὰ παντός —temporal.

8. τὰ εἰκότα θαυμάζεσθαι —to receive the proper marks of honour, for which see c 25. 4.

12. ἀρέσκοντες —Soph. OT 274 ὅσοις τάδ’ ἔστ’ ἀρέσκοντ’.

13. ἐπιστρατεύομεν — ‘nor is it our way to attack a colony exceptionally unless we have suffered ...’ The partic. must be conditional; but the sense is much improved by ἐπεστρατεύομεν, sc. ἄν, nor should we be attacking them (Corcyra) in a manner so exceptional (as we are doing). Thus μὴ ἀ. would=εἰ μὴ ἠδικούμεθα. If ἐπιστρατεύομεν be right, ἐκπρεπῶς may=‘unreasonably,’ being explained by μὴ ... ἀδικούμενοι: but ‘exceptionally’ has much more point here.

14. καλὸν δ’ ἦν —cf. c. 37. 5 .

16. αἰσχρόν —slight anacoluthon, adding to the vigour of the sentence.

17. μετριότητα —sc. εἰ μέτριοι ἦσαν.

ὕβρει δὲ κτλ. —solemnity of ‘gnomic’ style; cf. L. & S. under κόρος .

19. κακουμένην —temporal.

20. προσεποιοῦντο —as in c. 8. 3. For the treatment of Epidamnus by Corcyra see c. 24, and for the intervention of Corinth c. 26.

21. ἔχουσι —now hold it.

23. ἥν γε κτλ. =ἀλλὰ ταύτην γε οὐκ ἐκεῖνον δς προύχων καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ἀσφαλοῦς προκαλεῖται, so that προύχοντα , from a position of superiority (gained by the use of force), is coordinate with ἐκ τοῦ ἀσφαλοῦς .

25. λέγειν τι —talk seriously.

26. ἐς ἴσον ... καθιστάντα —this clause is in contrast with προύχοντα καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ἀσφαλοῦς, and must mean that in order that a demand for arbitration may be entertained, the party making the demand must first set himself on a level with the other party not merely in free discussion with him, but (what is more important), by giving up any advantage he has gained till a decision is arrived at. Transl. ‘but he who, before having recourse to arms, puts himself in deeds as well as in words on a level.’ πρὶν διαγωνίζεσθαι may mean before any solution, whether by arms or arbitration; but πρὶν πολιορκεῖν favours the more confined sense. The meaning of ἐς ἴσον ... καθιστάντα cannot be, according to the old explan., ‘whose deeds square with his words.’

28. πρὶν πολιορκεῖν —πρίν before; for the infin. after a neg. preceding πρίν cf. c. 68. 2.

5. ξυμμαχεῖν ... ξυναδικεῖν —c. 33. 4.

διαφόρους ὄντας agrees with σφᾶς.

7. προσιέναι —to have applied to you.

8. ἐν ᾦ —under present circumstances, when.

11. ἀπογενόμενοι =οὐ μεταλαβόντες.

13. κοινώσαντες —having given you a share in. The confusion of κοινοῦν and κοινωνεῖν (have a share in) in MSS. is very common. τὰ ἀποβαίνοντα means ὠφελία, the natural result τοῦ παλαι κοινῶσαι τὴν δύναμιν. (έγκληματων in C is an oversight—see the next line. The text of G gives a Scholium on this false reading from πάλαι to ἐγκλημάτων.)

21. ἀγράφων =τῶν μήπω ἐγγεγραμμένων.

οὐ τοῖς κτλ. —that clause does not apply to those whose application is intended to cause injury to others.

22. ἀλλ) (ἐκείνῳ) ὅστις —who does not withdraw from another; cf. c. 38. 1. For the construction of ἀποστερῶν Croiset quotes Antiplion v. 78 οὐκ ἀποστερῶν γε ... ἑαυτὸν οὐδενός (neut.).

24. τοῖς δεξαμένοις κτλ. —will not cause war instead of peace for those who have admitted them : εἰ σωφρονοῦσι applies to the whole sentence, and means as they—those to whom they make the application—know if they are prudent. The brachylogy is the same as in 6.11. 7 οὐ περὶ τῶν ἐν Σικελίᾳ ... ὁ ἀγών, εἰ σωφρονοῦμεν, and also in 3.44. 1. (This is Steup's view, the best explanation that has been given of this awkward sentence. Classen, Stahl, Kruger and others assume that the ref. is to the conduct of the parties after the alliance is concluded, and nnderstand ‘who will assure peace, not war to those who receive them, if they, οἱ δέξάμενοι, show ordinary discretion.’ Croiset seems to refer εἰ σωφρονοῦσιν to those making the application, but the two parallel passages tell against this. Weil proposes κεἰ σωφρονοῦσιν .)

25. ποιήσει —will cause.

ὅ —i.e. τὸ πόλεμον ἔχειν κτλ.

3. ἐνσπόνδων —i.e. you would be wiped out of the thirty years' truce, so far as we are concerned.

ἀνάγκη γάρ —the threat, we shall include you with them in our hostile measures, is vagnely expressed. τούτους is obj. to ἀμύνεσθαι, and μὴ ἅνευ ὑμῶν=μεθ’ ὐμῶν.

5. καίτοι —here means and surely, not ‘and yet.’

δίκαιοί γ) —the personal construction common with δίκαιος .

6. ἐκποδὼν στῆναι —neutrality is your best plan.

9. δῑ ἀνοκωχῆς ... ἐγένεσθε —cf. c. 73. 2 δῑ ὄχλου εἶναι. ἀνοκωχή is an armistice.

10. ὥστε ... δέχεσθαι explains τὸν νόμον.

11. Σαμίων ἀποστάντων —in 440 B.C., c. 115. The resemblance between the two cases is more verbal than real. The Corinthian keeps using ἀποστῆναι of Corcyra; but Corcyra's ἀπόστασις was really only the estrangement of a colony from the mother-city, whereas Samos really revolted from the Athenian alliance.

13. δίχα ἐψηφισμένων —were divided in their votes.

14. ἀντείπομεν —made a counter proposal.

15. αὐτόν —ipsum. τινά =πάντα τινά.

16. εἰ γὰρ τοὺς κακόν κτλ . — an argument from expediency to support the exhortation τὸν νόμον μὴ καθιστάναι ... δέχεσθαι. But the γάρ is strange, and should perhaps be altered to δέ or τε. (Steup proposes to place this sentence at the end of c. 42, where τῷ αὐτίκα φανερῷ fits in with φανεῖται καὶ ἅ .)

17. τιμωρήσετε —supply a dat.; the case of the common object follows the partic. according to the usual const.; cf. c. 5. 1.

φανεῖται καὶ ἅ — perhaps ‘a prophecy after the event’ due to Thuc. himself. Potidaea, Lesbos and other parts revolted not so long after. ἅ (in place of οἴ) adds to the bitterness of the sentence; and the unexpected word φανεῖται is sarcastic, φαίνομαι being constantly used in this way of the coming of deliverers, helpers, etc. (ο· λωφήσων γὰρ οὐ πέφηνέ πω, ὦ χρόνῳ φανείς and so on). From the point of view of Corinth the revolt would be a ‘coming’ of this kind.

23. ἥν —antecedent χάριτος. We are not your enemies, so you cannot refuse on that ground; we are not your friends, so that you cannot object that services on both sides are natural, and that we should not reckon what we did for you as laying you under an obligation. The ἐπι‐ denotes reciprocity: to be on terms of intimacy. This antithesis is somewhat artificial, and, but for the verbal correspondence, we should look for something like ὤστ’ εἰκὸς εἶναι προῖκα ἐπιχρῆσθαι ἡμᾶς (you and we) ἀλλήλοις. (The transl. ‘so as to use you freely’ would be easier; but there is no authority for ἐπιχρῆσθαι in this sense.)

27. ποτε —in the first war with Aegina, 505-491 B.C.; hence ὑπὲρ τὰ Μηδικά=πρὸ τῶν Μηδικῶν, see c. 14. 2.

2. ἐπικράτησιν —the partiality of Thuc. for nouns in .σις formed from verbs is well known; some of them, like this and πρέσβευσις (c. 73), occur nowhere else in classical authors. A good example of the preference for nouns over verbs occurs at c. 137. 4 γράψας ... διάλυσιν: ἐνθύμησις, p. 117, l. 5.

4. οἷς for ἐν οἷς after ἐν καιροῖς, by a common idiom.

9. τὰ οἰκεῖα —their own interests.

11. νεώτερός τις —in ref. to the Aeginetan War. The sing. has attracted the verbs into the sing. in spite of ἐνθυμηθέντες. αὐτά might of course have been omitted, but Thuc. is fond of putting it into the second member of a rel. sentence. (To repeat the rel. is exceptional.)

13. τοῖς ὁμοίοις ἀμύνεσθαι —to requite us with like treatment. ἀμύνομαι in this sense generally implies the paying back of injuries, and here we should expect ἀμείβεσθαι (see crit. note, and cf. L. & S. under ἀμείβομαι). Presently we have an ordinary phrase, τὸ ἴσον ἀνταποδοῦναι: but it may be that, in opposing the Corinthian “ δίκαιον” to the Corcyrean “ ξυμφέρον,” Thuc. purposely makes the speaker use a word that is properly used of dealings between enemies; the speaker means “They say we are your enemies (see c. 33. 3): you must judge of that by our actions in the past, and pay us for our so-called enmity with the same sort of ‘enmity.’”

15. εἰ πολεμήσει —in the event of war. The Corinthian, like the Corcyrean, insisted on (1) τὸ δίκαιον, (2) τὸ ξυμφέρον, but—as Fr. Muller says—he deals vaguely with the latter topic, since Corinth had clearly less to offer Athens than Corcyra had.

16. ἐν ᾦ —c. 37. 4. ἕπεται =‘is found,’ ‘is there.’ It is a moral sentiment—much like ‘virtue is its own reward’— but not much in point here. Grammatically τις is for τινι, being attracted into the relative clause.

17. τὸ μέλλον τοῦ πολέμου —i.e. it is not certain that war is coming.

20 ἐπαρθέντας αὐτῷ —prompted by that expectation; Eur. Orest. 286 ὅστις μ’ ἐπάρας ἔργον ἀνοσιώτατον (to a ...) κτλ .

22. ὑπαρχούσης πρότερον —that existed already. This is the Engl. equivalent, though ὑπαρχούσης is really imperf. partic., past in reference to ὑφείλομεν. ὑφελεῖν μᾶλλον is to diminish rather than to add to, and the gen. is partitive (μᾶλλον does not belong to σῶφρον as Classen took it). For πρότερον ὐπῆρχε cf. vii. 28 πόλεμον οὐδὲν ἐλάσσω προσανείλοντο τοῦ πρότερον υ·πάρχοντος. The transl. ‘that has existed for some time’ is simple, but scarcely justified.

διὰ Μεγαρέας —what event is alluded to? Edd. are much divided between (1) ‘the Megarian decree,’ by which Athens excluded Megara from all her ports and markets (c. 67); (2) the revolt of Megara to Athens after a dispute with Corinth (c. 103 for τὸ σφοδρὸν μῖσος that Corinth conceived for Athens on this account) in 465 B.C.; (3) the revolt of Megara with Corinthian support, from Athens in 445 B.C. (cc. 114-115). The ὑποψία is that felt by Corinth, so that (3) appeais unlikely—note ἔγκλημα. As (1) is the only one of these events that had happened since the thirty years' truce. it is the most probable; but the date of the Megarian decree is unfortunately doubtful, and some suppose, on insufficient evidence, that it was not passed so early as 433 B.C.

23. ἡ τελευταία χάρις —the service that Athens will render to Corinth by refusing the Corcyrean request. ‘This will be highly opportune, though involving a trifling sacrifice’ (Morris).

25. μεῖζον ἔγκλημα —the complaint that we have against you about Megara. (If the first explan. above is right, this ἔγκλημα would be that Athens had violated the thirty years' truce.)

1. διὰ κινδύνων — with ἔχειν= ἐπικινδύνως. Classen constructs τό with πλέον, to which it is objected that πλέον ἔχειν, not τὸ πλέον ἔχειν= πλεονεκτεῖν, be grasping; and hence Cl. proposed τι for τό. But διὰ ... ἔχειν is a combination of two phrases:

(1) διὰ κινδύνων τὴν δύναμιν ἔχειν ,

(2) διὰ κινδύνων πλέον ἔχειν.

For (1) cf. vii. 8 τὸ στρατόπεδον διὰ φυλακῆς μᾶλλον ἢ δῑ ἑκουσίων κινδύνων ἔχων. The art. before πλέον is occasioned by the preceding δύναμις. Stahl constructs τό with ἔχειν, but the position of the two members outside the article—τῷ ... ἐπαρθέντας and διὰ κ.—is against this.

2. περιπεπτωκότες οἷς ... κολάζειν — the simplest explan. is ‘now that we find ourselves in the condition that we spoke of at Sparta, when we urged ...’ Thus οἷς = ἐκείνοις ἅ, προείπομεν does double duty, ‘spoke of, and urged that’ and τοὺς ... κολάζειν is epexegetic. The only objection is that this is rather artificial. The condition alluded to is that of a city whose allies are in α·πόστασις, as Corinth holds that Corcyra is from her—διὰ παντὸς ἀφεστᾶσι. Stahl followed by Classen and others supplies περιπεπτωκότα after οἷς , now that we find ourselves in the circumstances in which, as we ourselves urged ... This is doubtful giammar. Dobree bracketed τοὺς ... κολάζειν as spurious and repeated from c. 40: this gives an easy construction, and σφετέρους instead of ἑαυτοῦ, with sing. αὐτόν τινα, is unusual.

18. τῇ μὲν προτέρᾳ — temporal, like μάχῃ τῇ πρώτῃ vii. 11. ἐν δὲ τῇ ὑστεραίᾁἐκκλησίᾳ) must mean in the assembly held on the following day, according to the meaning of such adjs. in ‐αῖος. Cobet read ὑστέρᾳ, in the subsequent assembly. We must assume that the assembly met on the next day when a debate was adjourned (and this seems to be the meaning of καὶ δίς). There is no evidence.

23. σφίσιν =τοῖς Κερκυραίοις. αὐτοῖς =τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις.

ἐκέλευον ... ἐλύοντ’ ἄν —the condition expressed from the point of view of Thuc. himself (Forbes).

25. ἐπιμαχίαν —a defensive ( ξυμμαχία, an offensive and defensive) alliance.

26. τῇ ἀλλήλων —c. 15. 2 .

1. καὶ ὥς —i.e. even if they rejected the Corcyrean request altogether. ὥς= οὕτως often after καί, ἀλλ’ , οὐδ’, μήδ’.

6. ναυτικὸν ἔχουσιν —to be regarded as one word. Hence the insertion of τοῖς before ναυτικόν is unnecessary.

8. ἐν παράπλῳ —contrast the construction at c. 36. 2.

14. Κίμωνος —the great statesman. Plutarch says that he had given this name to his son out of compliment to Sparta.

18. ἐκείνων =τῶν Κερκυραίων.

22. παρεσκεύαστο —impers.

1. πέμπτος αὐτός —cf. c. 61. 1; 116. 1. The form of phrase denotes the chief in command.

2. κατά — opposite.

6. ἐξίησι —of water discharging into the sea only in Thuc. and Herod. until Polybius. These geographical details remind us of a similar passage in 2.102. Mr. Forbes thinks that Thuc. mentions the city because there was no town, but only a roadstead at Chimerium. But in the facts that follow there is no special significance, and it is more likely that we have here a trace of the manner of the logographers. Thuc., like them, is not averse to imparting information ‘by the way.’

8. ἐσβάλλει — the ordinary word in Attic in this sense is ἐμβάλλει .

10. ἔχει —sc. ἡ λίμνη.

ῥεῖ —sc. ἐνταῦθα.

13. τῆς ἠπείρου —partitive with a verb, as in ἅλλῃ τῆς πόλεως, etc.

20. παρῆσαν —were there, not ‘arrived.’

αὐτοῖς —Thuc. has this curious order several times.

21. Ζακυνθίων —allies of Athens. The interest and policy of Zacynthus coincided with those of Corcyra.

24. παρα‐βεβοηθηκότες —along the coast; cf. παρα‐ πλεῖν.

27. τριῶν ήμερῶν σιτία —cf. τριῶν μηνῶν μισθός, ὅσου εἷχον τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, etc.

28. ὡς ἐπί —both dat. and accus. are found in the same sense with this expression, and with a verb of motion the dat. occurs 3.4. 3; 6.34. 5.

5. τὸ δὲ ἄλλο —the construction shifts.

7. τῶν —necessary, because of c. 47. 1. The object of the peculiar order is to draw ἑκάστου εἷς together.

11. ὡς ἕκαστοι —cf. c. 3. 4 .

12. ταῖς ἄριστα τῶν νεῶν πλεούσαις —notice the order of the partitive gen.: the rule in Attic is that it is not placed in attributive position unless the last word is an adj. or partic., and even then it is rare except in Thuc.: the most exceptional instance of this order is 4.62 τοὺς τῶν Σικελῶν (‘among the S.’) ξυμμάχους.

16. πολλοὺς μὲν ὁπλίτας —in the Peloponnesian War only ten ἐπιβάται were on board; and it is specially noted (in the case of what battle?) in the seventh book as exceptional to have many fighting men on a trireme. But in the earlier sea-fights the opposing ships were rowed alongside, and the battle was really ‘a land fight on sea.’

19. ἀπειρότερον ἔτι —still with little experience of naval tactics.

21. τέχνῃ — dat. of cause, ‘not so much because of the skill displayed, but for the most part (sc. καρτερά) resembling a land engagement.’ The latter clause means it was like a stoutly contested land battle.

25. μᾶλλόν τι — ‘considerably more.’ The phrase is common.

26. καταστάντες —καθίστημι means frequently ‘put into a (settled) state,’ with ἐς: the intrans. ‘settle down.’ As the ships were motionless, a regular pitched battle was fought.

27. διέκπλοι —the famous manœuvre consisted of ‘rowing through the intervals of the enemy's linc, and thus getting in their rear, ... and before the ship of the adversary could change its position, of striking it either in the stern, or in some weak part’ (Grote). It is first heard of in Hdt. 6.12.

3. παραγιγνόμεναι —iterative.

5. μάχης ... ἦρχον —take the aggressive.

6. πρόρρησιν =ἃ προείρητο .

10. σποράδας —‘in confusion.

13. ἐρήμους —sc. οὔσας: cf. Xen. Anab. 2.1.6 πέλται καἱ ἅμαξαι ἦσαν φέρεσθαι ἔρημοι.

15. [τε ]—this joins the whole clause οἱ Κορινθιοι ... ἡσσῶντο to the second. It is scarcely necessary to bracket it.

18. ἀπὸ ἐλάσσονος πλήθους —compare the total numbers, c. 46. 1; 47. 1.

24. ἐγίγνετο —was beginning: better than ἐγένετο—the completion is first alluded to in c. 50. 1.

λαμπρῶς — decidedly. τότε δή introduces the decisive act.

26. ξυνέπεσεν —impers., ‘things came to such a pass.’

1. τὰ σκάφη μὲν κτλ .—all iterative, the imperfs. referring to the several huils disabled.

3. ἅς —when a rel. sentence stands for a substantive, no antecedent being expressed, Thuc. regularly attracts the rel., as in c. 37. 3 δικαστὰς ὧν βλάπτουσι. In 2.61 ἐγκαρτερεῖν ἃ ἔγνωτε is for ἐγκαρτερεῖν ἐκεῖνα (not ἐκείνοις ) ἃ ἔ. But when a rel. sentence stands as an adjective, the rel. is not necessarily attracted; cf. e.g. c. 52. 2 αἰχμαλώτων ... οὗς ... εἶχον: 7.1. 2 etc. See n. on p. 87 l. 16.

καταδύσειαν —not sank, but ‘disabled.’ The usual way was to tow them away as prizes.

4. φονεύειν ... ζωγρεῖν — depending on ἐτράποντο as in ἐτράποντο τὰ πράγματα ἐνδιδόναι 2.65. Thus ἐτράποντο has here a double construction. φονεύω is an Ionic word, not found in prose outside Herod. and Thuc.

διεκπλέοντες —the edd. point out that this cannot be the technical διέκπλους—the object of which, indeed, was not to kill, but to disable an enemy's ship (see on c. 49)—but merely alludes to rowing in amongst the enemy's disabled ships.

6. οἱ ἐπὶ τῷ δεξιῷ κέρᾳ —the Ambraciots and Megarians (c. 48. 4) who were defeated and pursued to the mainland (c. 49. 5). It is not possible to see how the conquering Corinthians on the left could have fallen in with any of the flying right wing unless some of those on the right wing had not fled with the rest towards the mainland; and that some were left behind is suggested by ἐπὶ πολὺ ... ἐπεχουσῶν .

9. ξυνέμειξαν —plup. in sense, and this clause belongs to what follows.

10. ὁποῖοι —not much different from οἵτινες, but denoting, as Stahl points out, that there were no distinguishing marks of dress and appearance to show whether those they fell in with belonged to the winning or losing side. Cf. the common use of ποῖος for τίς in tragedy.

11. ναυμαχία γάρ —cf. c. 1. 2 .

22. καὶ ὅσαι —i.e. those that had taken no part in the previous engagement.

26. πειρῶσιν —only Herod. and Thuc. use the active where Attic generally has πειρῶμαι.

1. πρύμναν ἐκρούοντο —began to back, so as to retire; cf. ἀνακρούεσθαι with or without πρύμναν .

6. ὀλίγαι ἀμύνειν — cf. 2.61 ταπεινὴ ὑμῶν ἡ διάνοια ἐγκαρτερεῖν; v. 3. 2 τὰ ὑπάρχοντα βραχέα περιγίγνεσθαι.

7. ὑποτοπήσαντες —rare and poetical verb, used by Thuc. several times only in aor. inhn. or partic.

9. τοῖς δὲ Κερκυραίοις —dat. of agent, which Thuc. with the poets uses with all parts of the passive.

10. ἐπέπλεον —sc. αἱ Ἀττικαὶ νῆες. With ἐκ τοῦ ἀφανοῦς supply αὐτοῖς, from a quarter where they were invisible.

12. πρίν — until: here and elsewhere the indic. is used after a positive sentence; but notice οὐχ ἑωρῶντο, and see M.T. 635.

13. ἐκεῖναι — yonder. Notice the vivid form.

16. ἡ ἀπαλλαγὴ ἐγένετο =ἀπηλλάγησαν .

17. ἐτελεύτα ἐς νύκτα —pregnant construction.

21. Ἁνδοκίδης —there is some donbt about the name, because an inscription relating to the expenses of this fleet is extant, and in it Glaucon is mentioned as στρατηγός, and two other names, both mutilated, are given (see crit. note); neither name can have been Andocides. However, if Andocides did hold some sort of command in this fleet, he is the grandfather of the orator Andocides. (My opinion is that the text is right, and that Thuc. has made a mistake here. If Andocides is the wrong name, Leogoras, too, must be due to corruption; and the double corruption seems very unlikely. If Andocides sen. had held this command, the orator would have alluded to the matter. He mentions that his grandfather had a hand in the thirty years' peace.)

26. ὡρμίσαντο —subject ‘the Athenian ships,’ the abrupt change being characteristic.

4. βουλόμενοι — for this ‘sense’ construction after νῆες cf. 110. 4.

5. τὰς μὲν ναῦς —poetical construction with αἴρω in this sense; elsewhere it is absol. or has ταῖς ναυσίν. Croiset compares αἴρειν στόλον in tragedy.

12. ἐπισκευὴν οὐκ οὖσαν —sc. ὁρῶντες, the two examples of τὰ ἄπορα being given in different form.

13. τοῦ ... πλοῦ =περὶ τοῦ πλοῦ, anticipating ὅπῃ κομισθήσονται: the gen. placed thus at the head of a sentence with a verb of speaking or thinking about is common in Plato; and the constn. comes down from epic. For trag. cf. Soph. OT 317, Trach. 169 τοῦ κασιγνήτου τί φῄς ; Plat. Rep. 576 D εὐδαιμονίας ὡσαύτως ἢ ἄλλως πως κρίνεις ;

18. ἄνευ κηρυκείου —cf. c. 146. Had they sent him with a herald's wand they would have admitted a state of war, and treated the Athenians as enemies.

21. πολέμου ἄρχοντες —acting as aggressors in war and breaking treaties: in reality the ref. is to the thirty years' treaty, but the vague expression heightens the effect.

26. λύετε —we expect λύειν. εἰ δ’ nearly=ἐπεὶ δέ.

1. τῶν δὲ Κερκυραίων —this is divided into τὸ μὲν στρατό πεδον and οἱ δὲ Ἀθηναῖοι, possibly because the Athenians and Corcyreans together make up the other, or Corcyrean, side; possibly by a slight anacoluthon.

2. ὅσον —as far as they were within hearing.

16. τά τε ναυάγια καὶ νεκρούς —the τε is answered by καὶ τροπαῖον ἀντέστησαν. The Corcyreans were able to recover their dead without asking permission. Hence, technically, they could support a claim to have won a success.

17. κατὰ σφᾶς —opposite them, i.e. ‘on their coast.’ The τά before κατά makes τοὺς νεκρούς unlikely.

18. (ὑπὸ ) ἀνέμου, ὅς —a wind which.

20. τοῖς ἐν τῇ νήσῳ Συβότοις —Sybota must be the name of some place on one of the group of islands collectively called Sybota.

28. τριάκοντα ναῦς —c. 49. 5 : ἀνελόμενοι c. 54. 1 : ὅτι ὑπεχώρησαν c. 51. 1 : οὐκ ἀντεπέπλεον c. 52. 2. The claims put forward by the Corcyreans are set out in a formal style; notice esp. the repetition of ἐπειδὴ Ἀ. ἦλθον.

11. κοινόν —in common. Corcyra must have had some share in the colonisation of Anactorium.

16. ἐν θεραπείᾳ εἶχον —treated them with great consideration, cf. θεραπεύω and θεράπων. These prisoners returned in 427 B.C. and civil war broke out in Corcyra.

19. δυνάμει — influence.

21. περιγίγνεται —not ‘defeated,’ but ‘maintained its ground.’ Corinth had not secured Epidamnus.

25. ἐς τοὺς Ἀ .—cf. c. 66. 1.

1. διάφορα —constituting matters of dispute leading to war.

2. πρασσόντων ὅπως —forming plans of.

7. φόρου ὑποτελεῖς —c. 19 .

8. τὸ ἐς Παλλήνην — i.e. the southern wall (see map), so that Potidaea would be accessible from the sea.

10. ἐπιδημιουργούς —δημιουργός is known from inscriptions to be the title of magistrates in many Dorian cities. ἐπι‐ would mean chief magistrates exercising some sort of general supervision.

13. Περδίκκου —Perdiccas II. of Macedon, son of Alexander the Philhellene. His shifty policy gave Athens much trouble in the Pel. War. Before 432 he was in alliance with Athens; but he presently encouraged Potidaea to revolt because Athens was in alliance with his brother Philip and his cousin Derdas. In 431 he was reconciled for a time to Athens.

14. ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης —prop. ‘in the direction of Thrace,’ the regular way of referring collectively to the Greek cities on the coast of Thrace, esp. Chalcidice.

15. ταῦτα δὲ κτλ .—the battle ... had only recently been fought when the A... ...

19. φανερῶς ἤδη —their hatred of Athens is of earlier origin. See p. 38 l. 22 note.

21. ἐπεπολέμωτο —c. 36. 1 .

25. ἔς τε πέμπων ... καὶ ... προσεποιεῖτο —the construction passes from the partic. to the finite verb. This form of anacoluthon is by no means confined to Thuc.; but cf. e.g. ii. 47. 3 λεγόμενον μὲν ... οὐ μέντοι ... ἐμνημονεύετο γενέσθαι.

1. προσεποιεῖτο —tried to ... .

8. ἔτυχον γάρ introduces what follows, as in c. 31. 2.

10. αὐτοῦ —Perdiccas.

11. δέκα —there would thus be eleven στρατηγοί, and five more belonging to the same year are mentioned in c. 61. As the number of στρατηγοί was regularly ten, Kruger altered δέκα to τεσσάρων (δ’ ). But instead of μετ’ ἄλλων τεσσάρων we expect πεμπτοῦ αὐτοῦ. Perhaps Thuc. wrote only μετ’ ἄλλων, and had no record of the number; cf. c. 51. 4.

20. [ἔπρασσον ]—this spoils the structure of the period, for the principal sentence must begin at τότε δή. There is, for example, a similar intrusion of a verb—μετεῖχον—in 2.16; ἔξεστιν in viii. 27.

22. ἐκ πολλοῦ —for a long time.

23. αἱ νῆες αἱ —the ships that were to operate against M. were sent just as much against themselves. (c. 57. 6 )

25. τὰ τέλη —c. 10. 4; cf. παν‐τελής, having full τέλος.

27. κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον —this occurs after τότε δή again in 2.84.

4. ἀνοικίσασθαι —c. 7.

5. μίαν πόλιν ἰ .—predicate.

6. τῆς ἑαυτοῦ γῆς —partitive, with ἔδωκε. τῆς Μυγδονίας may be in apposition, but perhaps depends on περὶ τὴν λίμνην. The construction would be improved with τά before περί, as νέμομαι περί is unusual. νέμεσθαι depends on ἔδωκε: to cultivate and live from (Forbes).

14. ἀφεστηκότα —in a state of revolt.

16. ξυναφεστῶτα —not ‘with Perdiccas,’ but ‘together.’

18. τὸ πρῶτον —this was their original purpose. The orders about Potidaea had been added subsequently.

20. ἄνωθεν —from the upper country.

21. ἐν τούτῳ — hereupon

24. περί —common in Thuc. with dat. after verbs of fear, and this is usual in Attic. ἐφοβεῖτο περὶ τοῦ πολιτικοῦ in viii. 93 is unusual.

27. τοὺς πάντας —in all.

4. ὕστερον ... ἤ —cf. τοὐναντίον ἤ. We might have ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ἀφ’ οὗ or ὅτε in place of this. (ἤ, not ᾗ, is probably necessary. The confusion of the two is common.)

7. τῶν πόλεων —objective; cf. Antig. 11 μῦθος φίλων.

9. ἐπιπαριόντας — technical word of an army advancing on an objective. The force seems to have gone by land (ἐπιπαρόντας of the MSS. is almost certainly a blunder). Cf. Anab. III. IV. 30 κατὰ τὸ ὄρος ἐπιπαριόντες ἀφίκοντο εἰς τὰς κώμας .

14. τοὺς προτέρους —c. 57. 6 .

15. Θέρμη —Thessalonica.

16. προσκαθεζόμενοι —the form does duty as aorist; cf. c. 24. 7; p. 120 l. 5.

20. παρεληλυθώς —the arrival of.

22. ἐς Βέροιαν —Beroea is in Macedonia, and seems out of the route. Herbst proposed to read περαιωθέντες ἐκεῖθεν for ἐς Βέροιαν κἀκεῖθεν. The text cannot be regarded as certain. Grote thinks another Beroea, otherwise unknown, must be meant.

ἐπὶ Στρέψαν — this well-known conjecture for ἐπιστρέψαντες suits excellently with πειράσαντες τοῦ χωρίου, which with the MSS. reading gives no sense. The exact position of Strepsa is unknown; but no objection lies in the fact that it is not mentioned by Herod. in a list of Greek cities on the Thermaic Gulf (123), as it may very well have lain outside the limits with which Herod. is dealing.

6. πρὸς Ὀλύνθου —on the side towards Olynthus near Potidaea (=τῆς πόλεως). The other reading Ὀλύνθῳ, is inconsistent with 62.3, and as Jowett says, Aristeus cannot have left Potidaea unprotected.

8. ἔξω τῆς πόλεως — the plan of bringing the necessaries outside a city and selling them to troops encamped there was often adopted when it was desirable that the men should not go inside. We hear of it elsewhere in Thuc. and in the Anab.

14. τοῦ Ἀριστέως ... ἔχοντι —ἔχοντα (see crit. note) would be regular before the infin; but ἔχοντι is likely to have been altered to this. The dat. is used as if ἔδοξε τῷ Ἀριστεῖ had preceded. The only exact parallels cited for this are from Homer and tragedy; cf. Soph. OT 350 ἐννέπω σὲ ... ἐμμένειν ... ὡς ὄντι. In order to avoid the change, τῷ μέν for τὸ μέν agreeing with ἔχοντι has been proposed; but the expression so produced (τῷ ... ἔχοντι) is not very probable: we should expect αύτῷ μέν.

16. τοὺς ἔξω ἰσθμοῦ —the (other) allies from beyond the Istlimus (of Pallene). ἰσθμός is treated as a proper name.

19. ἐν μέσῳ αὑτῶν —i.e. himself being on their north side and the Chalcidians and Bottiaeans attackmg them from the city.

24. τοὺς ἐκεῖθεν —cf. c. 8. 2 ; 18. 1.

25. ἀναστήσαντες τὸ ς .—having broken up the camp at Gigonus.

1. ξυνέμισγον — the battle of Potidaea. It was probably not in this battle that Socrates saved Alcibiades' life; but in another battle at Potidaea in 430 B.C.

4. λογάδες —for the ordinary ἐπιλέκτοι, not used by other Attic prose writers. (Suidas, S.V. λογάδην .)

τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτούς —the division that faced them.

5. ἐπὶ πολύ —of ground covered.

7. ἐς τὸ τεῖχος —of Potidaea.

12. διακινδυνεύσῃ —deliberative. χωρήσας with ὁποτέρωσε.

13. δ’ οὖν —for MSS. γοῦν: see the same correction at c. 10. 5. Here δ’ οὖν suggests a hesitation on the part of Aristeus, the details of which Thuc. has omitted.

14 ὡς ἐς ἐλάχιστον χωρίον —i.e. to concentrate his division so that closely united it might force its way.

16. παρὰ τὴν χηλήν —the object is to enter Potidaea from the south, as it would have been risky with the enemy in the way to have forced a way in at the north. The χηλή is a mole or break-water running out into the sea, which at low tide is shallow, on the east side of the city.

18. ἀποβαλών —this is used specially of losing men by a sudden attack of an enemy.

19. ἀπέχει —sc. Olynthus; ἀπεῖχε (see crit note) would be a common use of imperf. in giving geographical details; cf. e.g. 2.13 τοῦ ... τείχους στάδιοι ἦσαν κτλ.; many exx. from Anabasis is Kühner's n. on Anab. 1.4.9. Of course the pres. is also possible, and ἔστι favours it here. (The imperf. is equally used when the fact given implies the result of the writer's observation: so that it is not right to draw a distinction here.)

20. ἔστι —sc. the ground between the two cities.

22. ἤρθη —to summon the troops from Olynthus.

26. κατεσπάσθη —plup. in sense.

1. παρεγένοντο —ἐν τῇ μάχῃ.

6. Ἀθηναίων δέ —the inscription placed over the monument of these men in the Ceramicus is in the Brit. Mus.: Hicks, Manual, p. 59. The last of the three stanzas is:

Ἄνδρας μὲν πόλις η·/δε ποθεῖ καὶ δῆμος Ἐρεχθέως, πρόσθε Ποτειδαίας οἳ θάνον ἐν προμάχοις

παῖδες Ἀθηναίων. ψυχὰς δ’ ἀντίρροπα θέντες ἠλλάξαντ’ ἀρετήν—καὶ πατρίδ’ εὐκλέϊσαν.

αὐτῶν —Thuc. had not heard the numbers of the allies who fell.

7. ἐκ —cf. πρός, which might have been used here, c. 62. 1.

8. τεῖχος —this is deleted by Classen and others; but the sense is ‘they cut off (from communication with the north) the northern wall’—of course by building a wall farther north. See below 64.3 . ἐφρούρουν is intrans.

10. ἀτείχιστον —not ‘unfortified,’ which is not true (see c. 56. 2), but ‘not walled off,’ ‘not isolated’ from the south.

13. διαβάντες —by sea.

14. γενομένοις —the aor., though weakly supported, is necessary, ‘if they should have divided’ being clearly the sense. In 6.100 we have correctly φοβούμενοι μὴ σφίσι δίχα γιγνομένοις ῥᾷον μάχωνται, because there the sense is ‘if they made a practice of.’

15. ἐν τῇ πόλει —at Athens.

18. Φορμίωνα —the celebrated admiral.

20. Ἀφύτιος —Ionic gen. of Ἄφυτις: cf.e.g. Τήρης Τήρεω 2.29.

23. ἀπετείχισε τὸ ... τεῖχος —the bracketing of τεῖχος makes the sense ‘walled it off on the south side’; cf. τὸ δ’ ἐς τὴν Παλλήνην above 64.1 (where, however, τεῖχος may be supplied). But ‘walled off the south wall’ may very well be the meaning as above in l. 8. Classen retains τεῖχος here and renders ‘built across the south line of circum vallation.’ This is scarcely the meaning of ἀποτειχίζω.

26. ναυσὶν ἄμα ἐφ .—with a fleet blockading it.

1. ξυνεβούλευε ... ἤθελε ... ἔπειθε — like ἐκέλευε: such words being often used in imperf. when a speaker is giving advice.

3. ἄνεμον τηρήσασι —cf. τηρήσαντες τὸν πορθμόν 6.2.

6. τὰ ἐπὶ τούτοις —cf. ὡς ἐπὶ τούτοις 6.45; vii. 45; ‘what was now necessary.’ Ar. Eccles. 82 τἀπὶ τούτοις δράσομεν .

7. ὅπως also depends on παρας κευάζειν.

τὰ ἔξωθεν — referring to what he could do for Potidaea when he got outside.

10. Σερμυλιῶν ... πολλούς —Sermyle on the west coast of Sithonia.

11. ἐς ... ἔπρασσεν —negotiated with; cf. e.g. πρὸς ὃν ἔπραξαν 2.7.

12. ὅπῃ =‘as to how.’

13. μετὰ δέ —now begins the costly siege of Potidaea.

18. αἰτίαι μέν —answered by οὐ μέντοι. What follows shows that αἰτίαι alludes only to the dispute about Potidaea—not to the affair of Corcyra as well.

προυγεγένηντο — this (προε‐), not προσεγεγένηντο, is the reading of all good MSS. As the ref. is to Potidaea only we should expect either προσεγεγένηντο had been added (to the Corcyrean dispute)—and this is read by many edd.—or αἰτίαι μὲν καὶ αὗται: cf. c. 56. 1 καὶ τάδε ξυνέβη ... διάφορα. But πρου‐ can stand; for now it is Ἀθηναίοις καὶ Πελοποννησίοις, not merely Ἀ. καὶ Κορινθίοις. Thuc. clearly means that the Corcyrean affair did not constitute a ground of war with Pel. in generai; and now explains why the dispute about Potidaea was such, though even that was a matter for Corinth on her own account in the first instance. προ‐ means before Sparta took any part. Cf. c. 67. 1 .

25. σφίσιν —with ἐμάχοντο, not as in c. 13. 3; 27.1; 61.1 with ἐλθόντες.

27. ξυνερρώγει —ξυρρήγνυμι .

4. τε —so.

παρεκάλουν — ‘invited,’ not by formal summons, which belonged to Sparta.

6. κατεβόων — with gen. ‘loudly accuse’; with accus., ‘shout down.’

7. σπονδάς —c. 53. 2.

9. φανερῶς —they were dependent allies of Athens.

10. κρύφα —sc. πρεσβευόμενοι.

12. κατὰ τὰς σπονδάς —the thirty years' truce; nothing is known of this particular clause in it.

13. προσπαρακαλέσαντες —thus supporting the Corinthian invitation. Steup renders ‘summoned before the assembly,’ holding that the embassies had already arrived in Sparta as the result of the Cor. invitation. This is impossible, unless we alter the text to προσκαλέσαντες: see c. 87. 4.

τῶν ξυμμάχων τε —partitive; edd. generally omit τε and make τῶν ξυμμάχων depend on εἴ τις(καί=‘also’). If τε is sound, then εἴ τις must mean any one else in the position of Aegina: no other state outside the Pel. alliance seems to have sent; see c. 69. 1; 87. 4.

14. ἄλλο —besides those wrongs alleged by Corinth and Aegina. Some accept Reiske's ἄλλος with or without the τε. The invitation is to all who hold that in their case Athens had in any particular broken the thirty years' truce.

15. ποιήσαντες — called.

20. εἴργεσθαι —see c. 139 .

24. ἐπεῖπον — added to what the others had said.

25. τὸ πιστόν — honesty, the good faith you show in your public and private life. This is the outcome of the ‘Lycurgean’ system. Cf. what Xen. says in the Polity of the Lac., of their virtues, which, when he wrote, were a thing of the past: ‘They endeavoured to be worthy to lead ... Others would go to Sparta and ask to be led by her against those who were thought guilty of wrong-doing... . Nowadays they obey neither God nor the ordinances of Lycurgus.’

26. καθ’ ὑμᾶς αὐτούς —among yourselves.

27. ἀπιστοτέρους ἐς τοὺς ἄλλους —i e ἐς(ἡμᾶς)τοὺς ἄλλους, hence λέγωμεν. Some, however, take ἐς τοὺς ἄλλους ἤν τι λ. together=‘if we bring any charge against others.’

28. ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ —i.e. ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀπιστοτέρους εἶναι. It is a mark of prudence or sobriety, but it leads you into more mistakes than you would make if you were less cautious in believing complaints.

5. τῶν λεγόντων =(τόδἐτῶν λεγόντων, so that the ὡς clause governs τῶν λεγοντων, cf. c. 52. 3. The gen. is often similarly used with θαυμάζω.

6. τῶν ... διαφόρων —private interests, i e. the interests of their city apart from the interests of the Pel. confederacy. ἰδίᾳ does not mean individual here. For such complaints to Sparta see c. 90, and for the negligence of Sparta see c. 118. 2 .

7. πάσχειν —we begin to ...

9. ἐν οἷς —(1) some render, ‘before whom’; cf. e.g. c. 85; (2) others, after Classen, with οὐχ ἥκιστα, and we among them have the best right, as in viii. 68 ἐν τοῖς ξυγκαταλύουσι ... πρῶτος ἦν. The latter suits the passage better.

10. ὅσῳ —inasmuch as; the καί balances μέγιστα with οὐχ ἥκιστα. We should render ‘inasmuch as ... , we have also the greatest right.’

15. εἰδόσι —sc. ὑμῖν.

16. μακρηγορεῖν, ὧν — most edd. supply ἡμᾶς (=τοὺς ξυμμάχους). And τοὺς μέν is then explained as Aegina; but how can Aegina be included under the ξύμμαχοι of Sparta? See c. 67. 3 εἴ τις. It is on all grounds better to understand ὧν as for ἐπεὶ ἐκείνων (i.e. τῶν Ἑλλήνων from τὴν Ἑλλάδα) with Conradt who is followed by Steup. Thus τοὺς μέν naturally refers to the subject allies of Athens, against whom it was a constant complaint that she ‘enslaved the Greeks.’

18. ἡμετέροις ξ .—Potidaea and her allies in Chalcidice: since they had revolted from Athens, they are reckoned as allies of Corinth.

19. προπαρεσκευασμένους —the relative is now lost sight of.

πολεμήσονται —pass., ‘shall become involved in war.’

20. ὑπολαβόντες —a gross misrepresentation.

23. ἀποχρῆσθαι —to make full use of (as a base of operations) in dealing with ... . (Poppo's view that αὐτοῖς=τοῖς ἐπὶ Θ is to be supplied to ἀποχρῆσθαι is clearly wrong.)

27. κρατῦναι κτλ .—see cc. 90 and 107.

28. ἐς τόδε =μέχρι τοῦδε.

1. ἀποστεροῦντες — a good ex. of the proper meaning, ‘withhold’ what belongs to another.

τοὺς ὑπ’ ἐκείνων δ .—the subject allies of Athens; see c. 68. 3. Sparta in the Pel. War claimed to be the ‘liberator of Greece.’ She had gained the reputation by her opposition to the τύραννοι .

2. τοὺς ὑμετέρους - the plain meaning is that A. has begun to act aggressively towards Megara and Corinth. (Perhaps ἡμετέρους used loosely as in c. 68. 3 is right here—see crit. note —or ὑμετὲρους should be read there.)

5. αὐτὸ δρᾷ —c. 5. 2.

τὴν ἀξίωσιν ... φέρεται —enjoys a reputation for generosity —lit. that, i.e. her, reputation ..., gained by such actions.

7. μόλις δὲ νῦν γε — see crit. note. If we assume a transposition for ἀλλὰ νῦν τε μόλις ξυν. καὶ κτλ. the τε might stand; but γε is certainly idiomatic here.

8 ἐπὶ φανεροῖς —with a clear issue before us. χρῆν γάρ explains this clause.

10. οἱ γὰρ δρῶντες κτλ .—a notoriously difficult sentence. The transl. ‘for they who act advance with plans already formed and without delaying, against men who have not made up their minds,’ in ref. to Athenian energy, is simple; but the statement is not true when made universal, and we certainly look for a direct ref. to the Athenians (hence the conjectures οἵ γε, οἵπερ, οἱ γὰρ Ἀθηναῖοι for οἱ γάρ). Classen rendered οἱ γάρ as ‘for they,’ like οἱ δέ, i.e. the Athenians, but himself doubted it; there is no prose ex. of ὁ before γάρ as pronoun, and more important, it is very artificial to separate δρῶντες. I should like to refer this general statement, with the transl. given above, to the conduct of the Lac., so that the general sense is ‘men of action (which you are not) take immediate steps, with their minds made up before their opponents are resolved on their course.’ The Athenians have not yet decided on war, and now is your time σκοπεῖν καθ’ ὅ τι ἀμυνούμεθα. It is a case for τὸ προεπιβουλεύειν, not τὸ ἀντεπιβουλεύειν. I think that οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι in the next sentence strongly favours my suggestion, as we then get a proper antithesis.

12. οἵᾳ ὁδῷ ... καὶ ὅτι κατ’ ὀλίγον —the two clauses after ἐπιστάμεθα are differently expressed: we should say rather, ‘we know that the A. are encioaching on others and how they do it.’ (The sentence is awkwaid: Cobet bracketed καὶ ὅτι. Possibly something is lost alter Ἀθηναῖοι.)

15. οἰόμενοι —while they think, as they do at present. When they conclude that you know, but do not care, ‘they will press on with determination,’ and no longer κατ’ ὀλίγον.

19. τῇ μελλήσει — intentions=τῷ μέλλειν ἀμύνασθαι .

21. διπλασιουμένην —see c. 123. 6; mind the tense. δύναμιν is evidently a gloss on the nnusual αὔξησιν , for which, as applied to Athens, see c. 89. 1.

22. ἀσφαλεῖς — sure, though slow; cf. Soph. OT 617, cited in L. & S, φρονεῖν γὰρ οἱ ταχεῖς οὐκ ἀσφαλεῖς. (In all other places in Thuc. ἀσφαλής=‘secure,’ but that is no reason why it should not mean sure here: he must have known of this meaning!)

ὧν =ἀλλ’ ὑμῶν.

ὁ λόγος τοῦ ἔργου ἐκράτει — so 2.42 οὐκ ἂν πολλοῖς ... ἰσόρροπος ... ὁ λόγος τῷ ἔργῳ φανείη, there are but few cases in which report does not outweigh fact. ὁ λόγος ὑμῶν=‘the report about you,’ your reputation; cf. p. 52 l. 7.

24. ἐκ περάτων γῆς —proverbial of remote countries.

πρότερον ἤ with infin., a rare constn. except in Herod. Thuc., Antiphon.

25. τὰ παρ’ ὑμῶν —your forces.

28. ἐπελθεῖν αὐτοί —together: so βούλεσθε μᾶλλον.

1. ἐς τύχας κ .—expose yourselves to the chances of war.

2. δυνατωτέρους —sc. than they were.

3. περὶ αὑτῷ ... σφαλέντα —cf. 6.33. 5 κἂν περὶ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς τὰ πλείω πταίωσιν: Aristoph. Pax 905 περὶ ταῖσι καμ‐ παῖς ... πεπτωκότες : Soph. Ajax 828 πεπτῶτα τῷδε περὶ νεορράντῳ ξίφει.

4. τὰ πλείω —sc. than through you.

5. ἡμᾶς —we, your allies. Thuc. is referring to the thirty years' tince, which was a set-back to Athens for the time being.

7. ὑμέτεραι —in you, of help from you.

8. καὶ ἀπαρασκεύους —καί is explained by its correspondence with διὰ τὸ πιστεῦσαι: because they had confidence in Sparta, they remained also (as a consequence) unprepared (E. Chambry).

9. ἔφθειραν —gnomic.

10. ἐπ’ ἔχθρᾳ τὸ πλέον ἢ αἰτίᾳ —to show our enmity, but rather to complain.

12. φίλων. ἐχθρῶν —objective. αἰτία in this second sentence=τὸ ἐπ’ αἰτίᾳ λέγειν, but ἔχθρα is not equivalent to τὸ ἐπ’ ἔχθρᾳ λέγειν, so Thuc. substitutes κατηγορία, which is. The habit of defining terms, common in Thuc., is, as Croiset remarks here, derived from Prodicus of Ceos, who gives a well-known specimen of his skill in this line in the Protagoras. Demosth. imitates this passage, Androt. 22.

ἁμαρτανόντων —milder than ἁμαρτόντων.

14. ἄξιοι —have a right.

16. ἄλλως τε καί —this clause must give a reason for the claim just made, and this can only be if διαφερόντων here= ‘the interests’ at stake, and not ‘differences’ between you and Athens. But διαφέροντας presently has the other sense.

20. ὑμῶν with διαφέροντας.

καὶ ὡς — καί is ‘nay’ or ‘in fact.’

21 νεωτεροποιοί κτλ .—we have echoes of this famous comparison in Demosth.

22. ἐπινοῆσαι ὀξεῖς —cf. Dem. Ol. 3, 15 γνῶναι πάντων ὑμεῖς ὀξύτατοι.

24. σῴζειν —sc. ὀξεῖς. sarcastic.

ἐπιγνῶναι —adopt further measures beyond a resolution to preserve what you have got.

οὐδὲ τἀναγκαῖα —contrast ἐπιγνῶναι μηδέν. The last clause =καὶ οὐκ ὀξεῖς ἐστε ἔργῳ οὐδὲ τ. ἐξ. By τἀναγκαῖα he means what will just do.

26. παρὰ γνώμην —γνώμη here and below prob.=‘judgment, forethought’: the A. are ever taking risks that their judgment forbids them to venture on; you hesitate to follow the sure indications of your judgment. There is an evident allusion to the favourite contrast between γνώμη and τύχη .

28. εὐέλπιδες —m Ar. Av. Euelpides personifies the venturesome character of Athenians.

4. καὶ μήν in oratory draws attention to a new and striking point, ‘then again.’

5. ἐνδημοτάτους —a marked trait in the Spartan character which was much modified by the Pel. War; though for a long time S. was deficient in vigour in the war.

7. τῷ ἐπελθεῖν — ‘aggression.’ There is no need to read ἐξελθεῖν; cf. 70.7, and the eontrast is as old as the Odyssey; π 27 οὐ μὲν γάρ τι θάμ’ ἀγρὸν ἐπέρχεαι ... | ἀλλ’ ἐπιδημεύεις.

9. ἐξέρχονται ... ἀναπίπτουσιν —explained (by Bonitz) as a metaphor from boxing: to follow up an advantage) (to be forced back— celerique elapsus vulnere cessit Aen. 5.445 .

10. τοῖς μὲν σώμασιν ... τῇ δὲ γνώμῃ —the points of this rhetorical passage are two: (1) the A. give their lives just as much as the S. for their city, but the A. regard their lives as of little worth, while the S. devote themselves entirely to the care of the body as the most precious thing they can offer to their city; (2) the A. use their intelligence in the service of their city, and for that end they cultivate their minds, whereas the S. neglect them. Thuc. has obscured his meaning by introdueing a contrast between ἀλλοτριώτατος not their own (but of course belonging to their city) and οἰκειότατος nearest and dearest to them. The Spartans too gave their lives for their city, but they regarded them as οἰκειότατος.

13. ἃ μὲν ἄν —i.e. when they do not carry out a new plan they have hit upon, they regard the failure as a loss of something that belongs to them.

15. πρὸς τὰ μέλλοντα —in comparison with what is to be done.

16. τυχεῖν πράξαντες —that in reality they have done, a very eommon meaning of τυγχάνω with partic.: e.g. Plat. Gorg. p. 468 D οίόμενος ἄμεινον εἶναι, τυγχάνει δὲ ὂν κάκιον.

του καὶ πείρᾳ ς .—if they fail too in anything they attempt. καί (in ref. to ἃ ἂν ἐπελθόντες κτήσωνται) emphasises the phrase.

17. ἐπλήρωσαν —iterative.

18. μόνοι γάρ —possession and desire, ‘have’ and ‘hope’ overlap, so impetuous are these Athenians.

20. καὶ ταῦτα κτλ .—imitated by Dem. de Cor..203 (Athens) ἀγωνιζομένη περὶ πρωτείων καὶ τιμῆς καὶ δόξης κινδυνεὐουσα πάντα τὸν αἰῶνα διατετέλεκε. (A misuse of the poetical αἰών is that of Polus τέχνη ap. Plat. Gorg. init.) It is a fine stroke of style that at the end of the contrast here, the antithesis is dropped and Athens alone is spoken of.

24. ἑορτήν —predicate. It is not likely that there is any ref here, as the Schol. who is followed by some edd. supposes, to the refusal of Sparta to set out for war during festivals. The passage is hyperbolical, and is spoiled by making it too precise. μήτε and τε correspond

25. οὐχ ἧσσον ... ἤ =μᾶλλον ἤ .

1. ἐᾶν —sc. ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν.

3. ταύτης —subject: τοιαύτης πόλεως pred., lit. this (city) that is opposed to you being such a city.

4. διαμέλλετε —persist in ... .

5. οἴεσθε κτλ .—you think that peace lasts longest not for those who in using their forces confine themselves to what is right, but (none the less) by their resolution show that, if wronged, they will not put up with it: instead of that, you deal out fair treatment with the object of not annoying others and, where you defend yourselves, of avoiding harm to yourselves. (1) τὸ ἴσον νέμετε represents δίκαια πράσσετε with slight modification: ‘fair treatment to you means (a) not provoking others and (b) overlooking a wrong if you find that self-defence will entail suffering on you.’ (2) ἐπιτρέπειν as practised by Sparta is explained as an attempt μὴ λυπεῖν τε ... βλάπτεσθαι. (All other explanations seem (1) to render ἀμυνόμενοι μὴ β as if it were μὴ ἀ. β, (2) to strain the meaning of τὸ ἴσον νέμετε: νέμω is not ‘control’ here; cf. p. 103 l. 25.

9. ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ κτλ .—there is anacoluthon here, since strictly we ought to have ἀλλ)(ἐκείνοις)οἳ ἂν ... νέμωσι corresponding to οὐ τούτοις κτλ But the ehange greatly heightens the effect.

11. μόλις δ’ ἄν —even if A. were as conservative as you, it would be almost impossible μὴ λυπεῖν τε ἄλλους καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀμυνόμενοι μὴ βλάπτεσθαι.

12. νῦν δέ —but in fact.

14. πρὸς αὐτούς —as compared with theirs.

ὥσπερ κτλ . — full form: ὥσπερ τέχνης (‘in an art’) τα ἐπιγιγνόμενα (‘what is new’) κρατεῖν ἀνάγκη, οὕτω καὶ ἐπιτηδευμάτων κτλ τέχνης is possessiie, with τὰ ἐ .

16. τὰ ἀκίνητα νόμιμα —alluding to the conservative νόμιμα of Lycurgus: τάδε ... κατέστησεν ὁ Λυκοῦργος ἐν τῇ Σπάρτῃ νόμιμα Xen. Lac. Pol. 7. 1.

17. πρὸς πολλὰ ... ἰέναι —those on whose resources there are many demands need constantly to think out new devices; cf. ἐπιτεχνᾶσθαι, plan something untried before, Herod. 2.2. 3; 119. 2.

20. ἐπὶ πλέον ὑμῶν —more than yours; cf. l. 14.

μέχρι ... τοῦδε ὡρίσθω — cf. Aeschin. 3.24 μέχρι τοῦδε εἰρήσθω μοι so far and no farther, ‘let this be the limit of.’ Strictly we have a fusion of—

(1) ‘So far let your slowness have proceeded,’

(2) ‘Here let your slowness end.’

Cf. on p. 69 l. 26.

22. ὑπεδέξασθε —see c. 58. 1 .

26. ἑτέραν —i.e. πρὸς τοὺς Ἀργείους, says the Scholiast. Such an alliance was formed between Corinth and Argos in 421 B.C.

28. πρός —in the eyes of.

29. τῶν αἰσθανομένων —intelligent men. The rendering ‘men who take notice of our actions’ does not suit the context. All Greece must ‘note’ an alliance formed by Corinth; not any special part of Greece; but ἀνθρώπων τῶν αἰσθανομένων could hardly mean τῶν Ἑλλήνων here. Those who look below the surfaee of things will not eondemn Corinth. αἰσθάνομαι is abs., as in 5.26 αἰσθανόμενος τῇ ἡλικίᾳ. That this limitation of ἀνθρώπων does not stand in the same relation to the noun as τῶν ὁρκίων stands to θεῶν is not a valid objection in Thuc.

1. ἐρημίαν — isolation.

ἄλλοις —in quest of an alliance.

2. οἷς ἂν ξυνομόσωσι — the parties to a ξυμμαχία have ‘the same friends and enemies’: hence the point.

3. μενοῦμεν — remain firm, pregnant sense fixed by ὑμῶν.

5. ξυνηθεστέρους — sc. ὑμῶν (not ὑμῶν προθύμων ὄντων, as with οὔτε γὰρ κτλ .).

7. μὴ ἐλάσσω —proleptic. ἐξηγοῦμαι of exercising ἡγεμονία in a league appears to take aceus. or dat.

9. τῶν δὲ Ἀθηναίων ἔτυχε γάρ —cf. c. 115. 4; viii. 30. The gen. follows the constn. of the clause immediately following, and this produces a confusion of constn. between

οἱ δ’ Ἀ. (ἔτυχον γὰρ ... παροῦσἀὡς ᾔσθοντο and τῶν δ’ Ἀ. ἔτυχε πρεσβεια παροῦσα και ὡς ῄσθοντο.

The anacoluthon is lessened by deleting καί, but it is only a matter of degree.

13. παριτητέα —Thuc. alone among prose writers affects this use of the plur. neut. of the verbal adj.; cf. c. 79 etc.

14. ἐγκλημάτων — cf. c. 67. 4. The Athenians saw that their business was to answer the Corinthian's speech. See Intr. p. XXXV.

16. δηλῶσαι δέ —if this were expressed as strictly parallel to the μέν clause, we should have δηλώσοντας δέ.

17. ἐν πλέονι —of time, like ἐν μέσῳ, ἐν ὅσῳ etc.

24. προσελθόντες —to the ephors; contrast παρελθόντες below.

26. εἴ τι μὴ ἀποκωλύοι —this is the reading of the Laurentian, and its evidence in such a point outweighs all the other MSS. The confusion between the forms of indic. subj. and opt. is continually met with in MSS.; this passage does not stand on the same footing as 6.21 where εἰ ξυστῶσιν is the only reading.

1. ἀντιλογίαν τοῖς — the dat. following the constn. of ἀντιλέγω, as in έπίπλους τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ etc.

7. οὔτε ἡμῶν οὔτε τούτων —prob. to be taken with οἱ λόγοι. The emphasis is on δικασταῖς: we are not in a court of law.

11. τοῦ ἐς ἡμᾶς καθεστῶτος —the general line of argument that is used against us.

16. ἀκοαὶ ... λόγων —hearsay.

18. εἰ καὶ δῑ ὄχλου μᾶλλον ἔσται αἰεὶ προβαλλομένοις — ‘even if it will prove an annoyance to you to have them continually brought before you.’ προβαλλομένοις, sc. ὑμῖν, is personal pass., cf. c. 126. 11 ; 140. 1; the act. would be προβάλλομεν ταῦτα ὑμῖν. (To supply ἡμῖν, as many edd. do, produces a sense inconsistent with what follows, esp. τοῦ δὲ λόγου μὴ παντὸς στερισκώμεθα. There is no need to read προβαλλόμενα with Classen; and to place the comma after ἔσται, as I formerly proposed to do, is no improvement.)

21. ἐκινδυνεύετο —impersonal. ‘It was to help the cause that we faced danger’—it was not φιλονικία (νίκη) that prompted us. ἐπ’ ὠφελίᾳ is intentionally vague, because the speaker is to emphasise the share that the Peloponnesians received; cf. c. 74. 3.

τοῦ ἔργου —the reality) (τοῦ λόγου the mention of it, ‘reference to it,’ when such reference is opportune for us.

24. μαρτυρίου — evidence (not ‘protest’).

25. ὑμῖν with καταστήσεται.

27. προκινδυνεῦσαι τῷ β . — ‘stand forward,’ ‘bear the brunt of battle against,’ as a πρόμαχος. Demosth. brings in προκινδυνεύω in the famous oath in de Cor. 208 μὰ τοὺς Μαραθῶνι προκινδυνεύσαντας κτλ.: he probably had this passage in mind.

3. ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων — masc.= οἳ (sc. οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι from τὴν Π.) ἀδύνατοι ἂν ἦσαν (Mr. Forbes takes ἀδυνάτων ὄντων as neut., like πλωιμωτέρων ὄντων c. 7 , εἰσαγγελθέντων c. 116— where see notes—as if we had ἀδύνατον ἃν ὄν. This will not do).

6. ὁμοίας —sc. καὶ (‘as’) πρὶν ναυμαχῆσαι (not ‘equal to the Greek’).

8. ἀνεχώρησεν —cf. c. 118. 2 .

τοιούτου κτλ .—cf. c. 71. 1.

9. δηλωθέντος —cf. c. 76. 2 .

ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ ... ἐγένετο —cf. e.g. Soph. OT 314 ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν.

13. ξυνετώτατον —again of Themistocles in c. 138; cf. 6.39 φημὶ ... βουλεῦσαι ἂν βέλτιστα τοὺς ξυνετούς. τὸ συνετὸν ὁ θεὸς δίδωσιν says Euripides.

14. ἐς τὰς τετρακοσίας —to make up the total of 400. Herod. gives 378 as the total, Aeschylus (Pers. 339) 310; cf. Dem. de Cor..238 τριακοσίων οὐσῶν τῶν πασῶν, τὰς διακοσίας ἡ πόλις παρέσχετο. Herod. also puts the number provided by Athens at 200. There is therefore an exaggeration here. (Some edd. read τριακοσίας.)

15. τῶν δύο μοιρῶν —in fractions when the denominator exceeds the numerator by 1, the larger number is omitted; cf. c. 10.

16. αἰτιώτατος ναυμαχῆσαι —instead of τοῦ ν., as Antiphon v. 23 ἐγὼ αἴτιος ἦν πεμφθῆναι ἄγγελον. When the Peloponnesians in the fleet wanted to retreat to the Isthmus, Them. sent a false message to Xerxes to the effect that now was his chanee to destroy the Greeks. The king then attacked the Greeks from the south. See on p. 121 l. 23.

17. καὶ αὐτόν —διὰ τοῦτο =δῑ ὅ after ὅπερ: see c. 10. 3 (or αὐτοί—sce erit. note, ‘you yourselves admitted how great a service he had rendered’). Cf. Herod. 8.33 of the visit of Them. to Sparta, μοῦνον δὴ τοῦτον πάντων ἀνθρώπων ... Σπαρτιῆται προέπεμψαν.

18. ἄνδρα ξ .—though ... τῶν ... ἐλθόντων with μάλιστα. Them. was presented with an olive wreath and a chariot at Sparta, and was escorted to the frontier by 300 mounted Spartans.

20. οἵ γε —quippe qui.

22. δουλευόντων —Greeks used δοῦλοι esp. of the subjects of the Great King.

24. μηδ’ ὥς —c. 44. 2.

2. τούτου —sc. τοῦ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν ὠφελεῖσθαι. οὐχ ἧσσον ... ἤ= ... μᾶλλον ἤ.

ὑμεῖς μὲν γάρ —the ref. is to the tardy dispatch of the Spartan army under Pausanias to Boeotia in 479 B.C.

3. ἀπό τε οἰκουμένων —from your cities that were undisturbed) (ἀπὸ τῆς οὐκ οὔσης ἔτἱπόλεως): ἐπὶ τῷ τὸ λοιπὸν ν ., ‘with the object of occupying them in the future’) (ὑπὲρ τῆς ... οὔσης, which there was but little hope of recovering. (Some following the Schol. see in πόλις a reference to the Athenian navy; this is only artificial and does not give a clear antithesis to ἐπὶ τῷ νέμεσθαι.)

9. τὸ μέρος —cf. c. 127. 2, like τὸ σὸν μέρος, τοὐμὸν μέρος in tragedy. ‘Did our part in rescuing you as well as ourselves.’ The emphasis is on ὑμᾶς, and there is a contrast with ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν καὶ οὐχ ἡμῶν τὸ πλέον of l. 5.

11. ὥσπερ καὶ ἄλλοι =ὥσπερ καὶ ἄλλοι δείσαντες προς., as others did.

13. ὠς —regarding ourselves as.

οὐδὲν ἂν ἔδει ἔτι —because it would have been of no use.

15. καθ’ ἡσυχίαν —without interference.

17. ἆρα =nonne.

18. γνώμης — resolve, sc. τῆς τότε: the gen. is governed by ξυνέσεως .

19. ἀρχῆς depends on έπιφθόνως διακεῖσθαι = φθονεῖσθαι. For the point see c. 96.

23. παραμεῖναι πρὸς τὰ ὑπόλοιπα τοῦ β .—remain at your post to attack what was left of the power of the Persians. See c. 95. 7 ; 96. 1; Herod. vir. 107.

26. ἔργου —the fact of accepting the ἡγεμονία .

27. ἐς τόδε —cf. c. 144. 4.

28. ὑπὸ δέους —fear of the Persians. τιμῆς —the honour enjoyed by Athens when she had once accepted the ἡγεμονία. ὠφελίας —interest.

1. καὶ οὐκ ἀσφαλές takes up τὸ πρῶτον: when we had acquired this power it was necessary to guard it.

2. καί τινων κτλ . = καὶ έπεί τινες καὶ ἀποστάντες ἤδη κατεστραμμένοι ἦσαν.

5. ὑπόπτων —there seems to be no advantage in rendering ‘suspieious’ here in preference to ‘suspected.’

6. πρὸς ὑμᾶς —i.e. now that you were no longer friendly to us, our allies would have taken to revolting to you.

8. τῶν μεγίστων πέρι κ .—when the greatest dangers are involved.

εὖ τίθεσθαι —cf. c. 25. 1; to manage well matters that are for their interest.

9. ὑμεῖς γοῦν —an example of the principle just stated.

10. ἐπὶ ... καταστησάμενοι —referring to the oligarchies; see c. 19.

12. ἐξηγεῖσθε —governs τὰς πόλεις.

τότε —in the Persian War.

13. ἀπήχθησθε —had become unpopular, cf. c. 75. 2. This is better than ἀπήχθεσθε , had been hated.

14. εὖ ἴσμεν μή —μή generally with a verb expressing confident belief impressed on others.

15. γυπηρούς — severe.

18. ἀπὸ τοῦ —like ἀπὸ τοῦ πράγματος Dem. 24.6.

19. διδομένην —when it was offered.

21. τριῶν —cf. c. 74. 1, and so 3.40. The conjecture is however scarcely certain, though elegant. See c. 75. 3.

24. καθεστῶτος —abs. like δηλωθέντος c. 74. 1 (not governed by ὑπάρξαντες), ‘it being established by precedent.’

25. ἄξιοί τε —the τε joins the clause to what precedes, and does not belong to the καί following.

26. δοκοῦντες —imperf.

μέχρι οὗ ... νῦν = μέχρι νῦν ὅτε (Croiset): ‘when, while (really) thinking of expediency, you profess to argue from justice.’ So in Bk. v. in the Melian dialogue τὸ ξυμφέρον is opposed to τὸ δίκαιον, and cf. the Corcyrean speech. ὁ δίκαιος(ἄδικος)λόγος = ‘the argument from justice (injustice)’; you tell us what we ought to do, but really think of your own interest.

1. παρατυχόν —when there was an opportunity; to προθείς supply τῆς ἰσχύος.

2. τοῦ μή —cf. c. 10. 1.

4. δικαιότεροι ἢ κατά —cf. c. 37. 3

6. γένωνται after οἴτινες: if this is the true reading — see crit. note—we have an instance of the epic and Ionie usage. See Goodwin M.T. 540. The only other ex. of pure subj. with ὅς in Thuc. is 4.17 οὗ μὲν βραχει^ς ἀρκῶσι, which is thought to be from a gnomie poet.

γ’ ἂν οὖν = γοῦν ἄν.

τὰ ἡμέτερα λαβόντας = εἰ ἔλαβον τὴν ἡμετέραν ἰσχύν.

8. ἐκ τοῦ ἐπιεικοῦς —i.e. ἐκ τοῦ μετριάζειν.

11. καὶ ἐλασσούμενοι γάρ —an ex. to show how Athens got a bad name as the result of her moderation. ‘For though in suits arising out of contracts against our allies we are at a disadvantage and in our own city have instituted courts for these cases under equal laws (i.e. laws under which they and we are treated alike), we are considered litigious.’ ξυμβόλαιαι δ . is probably from ξυμβόλαιον, a contract, and not from ξύμβολον, a treaty, δίκαι ἀπὸ συμβόλων were suits arising out of international treaties; but (1) it is not clear that Athens had such σύμβολα with the ὑπήκοοι, and (2) it is most improbable that in all such suits an Athenian had to sue in the courts of the subject state. It is known that δίκαι ἀπὸ συμβόλων were tried in the court of the defendant's state. If we assume that δίκαι ἐμπορικαί, commercial suits, which were tried in the state in which the contract was made, are referred to, the passage becomes clear. An Athenian litigant in the courts of the ὑπήκοοι is in an unfavourable position, whereas ὑπήκοοι in the courts at Athens are treated exactly like Athenians. Some think that ποιήσαντες τὰς κρίσεις refers to the compulsory jurisdiction at Athens in certain criminal cases, when a subject ally was involved. But even when both parties were ὑπήκοοι such cases were tried at Athens, whereas Thuc. is speaking only of cases in which one party was an Athenian: so supply ἐν ταῖς ... δίκαις in the second clause. In these latter cases the allies considered that they were badly treated. ([Xen.] Ath. Pol. 1.16 τοὺς μὲν τοῦ δήμου σῴζουσι, τοὺς δ’ ἐναντίους ἀπολλύουσιν ἐν τοῖς δικαστηρίοις. On the difficulties surrounding the judicial arrangements of the Athenian League see Holm, Hist. of Greece 2.217, Engl. Transl.)

13. ὁμοίοις —contrast with ἐλασσούμενοι. κρίσιν ποιεῖν = institute a trial.

18. διότι — why. The reason why others in our position do not go to law is that they use force. Mr. Forbes points out that the Persians, Scythians, and Carthaginians are instanced as ruling powers by Socrates in Xen. Mem. 1.1.11.

19. οἱ δέ —but they.

21. παρὰ τὸ μὴ οἴεσθαι χρῆναι —μή with χ., contrary to their opinion that it is wrong that they should be deprived.

ἢ γνώμῃ ἢ κτλ .—either by a decision (in our courts) or through the power we enjoy on account of our Empire. This passage refers not only to defeats of allies in the Athenian courts, but to cnrtailments of their rights (δυνάμει κτλ.).

24. τοῦ ἐνδεοῦς —at their (slight) inferiority. The gen. after χαλεπῶς φέρειν as in 2.62. 3 probably, unless στερισκόμενοι is to be supplied.

25. ἀπὸ πρώτης —cf. c. 15. 3. Perhaps ὁρμῆς or ἀρχῆς originally completed the phrase.

τὸν νόμον — law in general.

3. βιαζόμενοι —pass. as often in Thuc. and trag.

τὸ μὲν κτλ .—the one (τὸ ἀδικεῖσθαι) seems to be an act of over-reaching where both are equal, the other an act of compulsion where one is stronger. The infins. are impersonal. ἴσου and κρείσσονος are neut.

8. εἰκότως belongs only to ἡ δὲ ἡμετέρα κτλ., and is added as an afterthought, the general sense being: ‘It is inconsistent that they should chafe at our empire when they endured worse from the Persians, but it is not strange; for’ etc. The Persian power too was βαρύ, but they had to put up with that.

9. γ’ ἂν οὖν —c. 76. 4.

10. ἄρξαιτε —ingressive, ‘gain an empire.’

11. εὔνοιαν — good-will, which at present they enjoyed as professed ‘liberators’ (2.9. 4).

ἡμέτερον —c. 33. 3

12. οἷα ... ὁμοῖα —measures like those of which you gave some examples. δῑ ὀλίγου , for a short time. For the conduct of the Spartans as leaders, esp. for the hatred excited by Pausanias, see cc. 94 f.

14. γνώσεσθε —are going to adopt.

15. ἄμεικτα ... τοῖς ἄλλοις —i.e. τοῖς τῶν ἄλλων ν. For νόμιμα see c. 71. 5 .

17 ἐξιών —when he goes abroad Xen. Lac. Pol. also speaks of the change for the worse in the Spartan when he left home to assume a command.

οἷς with νομίζει = χρῆται, an Ionic use.

19. οὐ βραχέων —no trifling matters.

22. πρόσθησθε — assume, ‘take upon yourselves,’ cf. c. 144. 1. 4; Eur. Her. 146 ἴδια προσθέσθαι κακά.

24. φιλεῖ ἐς τύχας ... περιίστασθαι —is wont to turn out at last a series of chances, from which we (you and we) are equally remote (i.e. we cannot see into them).

26. ἐν ἀδήλῳ κ .—depends on what is hidden. The ordinary phrase would be ἐν ἀδήλῳ ἐστί, and so we have a compression of ἐν ἀ. ἐστὶ καὶ κινδυνεύεται. For this kind of expression cf. vii. 77 ἐν κινδύνῳ αἰωροῦμαι.

28. τῶν ἔργων —without stopping to think: as Thuc. says elsewhere, at the beginning of a war, men are impulsive. ἔχονται is equivalent to ἅπτονται.

ἃ χρῆν ὕστερον δρᾶν — if ἅ is right (and the Schol. as well as all MSS. has it), we cannot render ἅ a thing which, but must make τῶν ἔργων antecedent: nor is there any objection to this except that Thuc. regularly uses δρᾶν(αὐτό or αὐτά) differently; see c. 5. 2: but δρῶ τὰ ἔργα is good Greek, e.g. συννοίᾳ θ’ ἅμα οἷον δέδρακεν ἔργον Eur. And. 806.

29. ἤδη —only when, with κακοπαθοῦντες .

2. ὄντες οὔτ’ αὐτοί —strictly this should have been οὔτ’ αὐτοὶ ὄντες .

3. λέγομεν ὑ .—we charge you.

αὐθαίρετος —i.e. not forced on us by circumstances.

6. λύεσθαι —cf. c. 140. 2 τὰ ἐγκλήματα διαλύεσθαι.

ξυνθήκην —in the thirty years' truce.

8. ἄρχοντας —c. 49. 4.

ταύτῃ ᾗ ἂν ὑφηγῆσθε —following just wherever you may lead.

14. πάντας —sc. τοὺς ξυμμάχους καὶ τοὺς Ἀθηναίους .

16. ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ... ἔφερον —led to the same conclusion.

17. ἀδικεῖν —were guilty.

24. ὁρῶ —sc. πολλῶν π. ἐμπείρους ὄντας.

25. τοῦ ἔπγου —the thing, i.e. war.

26. οἱ πολλοί —in contrast with Archidamus and the elderly Spartans.

27. νομίσαντα —parallel to ἀπειρίᾳ.

2. Πελοποννησίους καὶ τοὺς ἀ .—i.e. our allies in Peloponnese and neighbours (who are not allies), esp. Argos. (Some see a hendiadys here, but it is unnecessary.)

3. παρόμοιος —a match for; cf. ἁντίπαλος .

5. ἐφ’ ἕκαστα —we can strike at any point promptly.

9. ἴπποις καὶ ὅπλοις καὶ ὄχλῳ —the transl. ‘cavalry and hoplites and light-armed troops’ is possible (cf. e.g. Xen. Anab. 3.236); but the simple rendering (ὄχλῳ = population) is borne out by τοῖς ὅπλοις καὶ τῷ πλήθει, c. 81. 1 .

12. φόρου ὑποτελεῖς —contrast c. 19. 1.

13. τίνι —neut.

17. ἔνεσται = μεταξὺ γενήσεται (Croiset).

ἀλλὰ τοῖς χ .—ἀλλά in rhetorical altercation, as often (e.g. 6.38. 5), ‘well then.’

18. ἐν κοινῷ —the treasury. The want of money at Sparta previous to Lysander's conquests is well-known. After the Pel. War there was a great change; but the money then acquired found its way into private hands, not into the treasury.

19. ἑτοίμως — easily. (The Spartans had not yet become conspicuous for covetousness, as after the war.)

20. φέρομεν —as an εἰσφορά.

21. τῷ πλήθει —the king includes the population of the confederate states. It is true that Sparta could pour a far greater number of troops into Attica than Athens could into the Peloponnese.

22. ἐπιφοιτῶντες —by repeated incursions. This was the method adopted, and this is probably written after the event.

26. τίς = ποῖος.

1. κἀν τούτῳ —‘in that case.

2. καλόν —sc. ἡμῖν. In καταλύεσθαι the mid. denotes reciprocity, as in σπένδεσθαι .

3. μᾶλλον —sc. ἢ αναγκασθῆναι πολεμεῖν.

7. οὕτως —adeo.

8. φρονήματι — pride, ‘high spirit.’

τῇ γῇ δουλεῦσαι —slaves to their land, so that they will not endure to see it ravaged, but will resist vigorously. Cf. Archidamus to the same effect in 2.11.6-8.

11. οὐ μὴν οὐδέ —c. 3. 3.

ἀναισθήτως —with ἐᾶν; a reply to the Corinthians; see c. 69. 3.

14. καταφωρᾶν —properly ‘catch (a criminal) in the act’; hence ‘detect,’ ‘discover.’

16. δηλοῦντας with πόλεμον implying a threat, and ὡς ἐπιτρέψομεν (for which cf. c. 71. 1) implying an admission; properly ‘explaining’; cf. c. 129. 1.

17. τὰ ἡμέτερ’ αὐτῶν —our own resources, both ξυμμάχων προσαγωγῇ and τῷ τὰ αὑτῶν ἅμα ἐκπορίζεσθαι The καί clause takes a new constn. after the long parenthesis. (Croiset thinks that τὰ ἡμέτερ’ αὐτῶν means our home resources only, and that τὰ ἡμέτερ’ αὐτῶν ἐξαρτύεσθαι is answered by τὰ αὐτῶν (sic) ἅμα ἐκ. which refers to the resources of the ξύμμαχοι. But τε after ξυμμάχων is much against this; and why should τὰ ἡμέτερ’ αὐτῶν be limited by ξυμμάχων προσαγωγῇ ?)

19. καὶ βαρβάρων —efforts by Sparta (and perhaps Athens) to obtain the support of Persia are already heard of in the early part of the war.

22. ἐπιβουλευόμεθα —by attraction to the ὥσπερ-clause.

24. τὰ αὑτῶν = τὰ ἡμέτερα αὐτῶν, our own as distinct from those of our ξύμμαχοι This is awkward after τὰ ἡμέτερ’ αὐτῶν above in a wider sense, and the use of αὑτῶν, otherwise common, for ἡμέτερ’ αύτῶν does not occur elsewhere in Thuc. Hence αὐτοῦ (adv.) and αὐτόθεν have been proposed.

26. ἐτῶν δύο καὶ τριῶν —cf. δὶς καὶ τρίς, δύο καὶ τρία βήματα : καὶ (‘even’) δὶς καὶ τρίς (see crit. note) etc. is also used.

1. ἤδη with what follows: when they see that while negotiating we are preparing quietly for war and maintaining a firm tone.

6. μὴ γὰρ ἄλλο τι —Archidamus argues against invading Attica at once, that as long as it is unravaged it is a hostage for the conciliatory behaviour of Athens in the negotiations; when once it is wasted, they will know that they have nothing to lose.

7. ἔχειν (sc. ὑμᾶς), by an idiom common in Thuc.=εἶναι ὑμῖν.

οὐχ ἧσσον —the more so. The cultivation of the poor soil of Attica was necessarily carried on with great care.

12. ὁρᾶτε ὅπως μή —the result may be trouble for the confederacy (τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ). There is much difference of opinion about the transl.: Classen says, ‘see that it do not turn out for us as regards Pel. in a more disgraeeful and difficult fashion’; Krüger and others, ‘see that we may not bring about a more disgraceful and difficult state of things for Pel.’—making πράξομεν trans. and αἴσχιον καὶ ἀ. adjj.: so Steup, but he renders, ‘see that we do not do (something) too disgraceful and awkward for Pel.’ Some think that ἢ τῇ Ἀττικῇ is to be supplied to the comparatives, others—but wrongly—ἢ νῦν. I construe ‘see that we do not fare in a manner more humiliating and difficult for the confederacy,’ sc. than if we refrain from invading Attica now, spurred on by these accusations. These ἐγκλήματα against Athens, it may be said, if we do not take up the cudgels (see next sentence), may involve αἰσχύνη and ἀπορία to the confederacy; but they can be disposed of by negotiation. To go to war at once may involve us in worse difficulties.

16. ἰδίων — separate, or ‘individual,’ thinking of Corinth and Megara.

18. εὐπρεπῶς —contrasted with αἰσχρῶς καὶ ἀπόρως πράξομεν .

θέσθαι —cf. c. 25. 1.

22. χρήματα φέροντες —and they contribute money. The Lac. allies paid no tribute.

23. ὅπλων —is a matter of, ‘calls for.’ Kruger compares e.g. Dem. de Cor..190 ἦν ἐκεῖνος ὁ καιρὸς τοῦ γε φροντίζοντος ἀνδρός. The gen. is one of description.

24. ὠφελεῖ —are of avail. The dat. with ὠφελεῖ is not very rare in poetry (see Jebb on Soph. Ant. 560), but ἠπειρώταις here belongs to ἔστι as much as to δῑ ἥν, etc., ‘especially in the case of a land power fighting against a naval power.’ Different explanations have been put forward of the meaning: some suppose Archidamus to allude to the necessity of obtaining a fleet (see c. 81. 4), others think that the allusion is to the equipment of large armies to remain in the field; but this is against the general argument of the speech. In θαλασσίους is included the idea of tribute-paying subjects: the Lac. have no fleet and no subject allies bound to pay for one. (This is a succinet restatement of cc. 81. 4, 82. 1. Archidamus rightly sees that success in a war with Athens depends on getting control of the sea. You cannot conquer a sea power on land, cf. c. 121, esp. 4 and 5, and c. 81. 1, 2. The two things needful to give success to the Pel. are δαπάνη and μελετή .)

28 τῶν ἀποβαινόντων depends on τῆς αἰτίας, the greater share of responsibility for the eonsequences.

ἐπ’ ἀμφότερα —i.e. for good or ill (καὶ εὐκλείας καὶ δυσκλείας says the Schol. on ii 11 δόξαν οἰσόμενοι ἐπ’ ἀμφότερα).

1. τι αὐτῶν —i.e. τῶν ἀποβαινόντων, let us take some thought of them beforehand.

τὸ βραδὺ καὶ μέλλον —referred to in τοῦτο and αὐτό below; μέλλον is only another name for βραδύ .

2. ἡμῶν depends on ὅ.

4. παύσαισθε —reach the end. If we begin in a hurry, we shall not be properly prepared, and the war will be prolonged.

5. καὶ ἅμα —the meaning is ‘we have always been free and famous, so our βραδύτης has served us well.’ This leads naturally to the reflexion that the so-called βραδύτης is really σωφροσύνη.

7. δύναται ... εἶναι —when δύναται = ‘means’ we do not find εἶναι: δύναται μάλιστα εἶναι = literally ‘can be on the whole,’ i.e. ‘may be called.’ τοῦτ’ is emphatic, ‘it is just this that.’ ἔμφρων too is emphatic; hence its position; and the etymological jingle σω‐φρος‐ύνη ἔμ‐φρων is equivalent to ‘true prudence.’ For σωφροσύνη cf. c. 68. 1, to which this is a retort.

10. τῶν ... ἐξοτρυνόντων depends as objective gen. on ἡδονῇ. There must be here a side ref. to the increasing influence of oratory in the Athenian ecclesia—ἔπαινος, ἡδονή (produced by rhetoric), κατηγορία all show it. The whole of this paragraph is an independent criticism of Athens as well as an answer to the contrast drawn by the Corinthians.

ξὺν ἐπαίνῳ —ξύν of the means is very rare (cf. 84.3 and c. 141 ξὺν φόβῳ), but occurs sometimes in Xen., as well as in poetry.

11. ἐπὶ τὰ δεινά —cf. c. 70. 2 .

13. ξὺν κατηγορίᾳ —like the Corinthian speech.

14. ἀνεπείσθημεν —for the aorist cf. c. 70. 7.

15. τὸ μέν —i.e. πολεμικοί. The meaning is ‘we are brave because we have a keen sense of honour, and we have a keen sense of honour because we are moderate’ But Thuc. proceeds in the opposite direction, and says, ‘The chief element in moderation (σωφροσύνη substituted for τὸ εὔκοσμον) is honour, and the main ingredient in the sense of honour ( αἰσχύνη = αἰδώς) is bravery.’ Cf. 3.83 τὸ εὔηθες, οὗ τὸ γενναῖον πλεῖστον μετέχει.

17. ἀμαθέστερον. παιδευόμενοι — causal partic., ‘not so highly as to despise the laws’; see c. 68. 1, but a different turn is given to ἀμαθία here in the retort.

18. καὶ ξὺν χ .—sc. παιδευόμενοι, which is again to be supphed to the following infinitives.

20. τὰ ἀχρεῖα —thinking on public policy for one's self, for instance, and putting before the assembly what you have thought of.

22. ἀνομοίως —not so well as the fine criticism would lead one to expect.

ἐπεξιέναι —sc. αὐτοῖς, i.e. τοῖς πολεμίοις (Stahl).

23. παραπλησίους —as good as ours.

24. τὰς προσπιπτούσας ... διαιρετάς —the chances that befall cannot be determined by argument. The general sense is ‘just as we do not despise the intelligence of our enemy, so we know that we cannot see into the future—how war will go —but must depend on our εὐψυχία and σωφροσύνη in preparing.’ διαιρεῖν is properly to make a gap in.

26. παρασκευαζόμεθα —see crit. note: αἰεί favours the indic., καὶ ... δεῖ the subjunc. But an exhortation here would come in very awkwardly before c. 85, where the peroration begins; and Steup, reading παρασκευαζώμεθα, thinks this whole section ( 84.4) properly follows c. 85.1.

4. ἐν τοῖς ἀναγκαιοτάτοις —in the most rigorous discipline; cf. ξὺν χαλεπότητι παιδευόμενοι above. (The rendering of Bonitz, ‘trained (only) in what is indispensable,’ as distinct from the useless wisdom of the Athenians seems to take us far beyond anything that Archidamus has said on the small extent of Spartan education, and a limitation— only—does not fit in well with the context.)

12. βουλεύσωμεν —come to a decision.

13. διὰ ἰσχύν —i e we need be in no hurry, because the Athenians, knowing our strength and that we are not overlooking what they have done (cf. c. 69. 3), will not dare to take any further step against us in the meantime.

18. πρότερον —before you too consent to arbitration.

20. κράτιστα —this and φοβερώτατα are pred. to ταῦτα (Classen). If Thuc. means καὶ τοῖς ἐν. φοβερώτατα to explain κράτιστα, the first καί must be omitted (see crit. note). The double καί makes two ideas.

2. καίτοι —yet surely, a common use.

6. καὶ τότε καὶ νῦν —ἦμεν is implied after τότε. The same form of sentence occurs in 3.40.2 and 6.60. 2. But in Plat. Gorg. p. 488 B we have ἀλλά ταῦτα ἔλεγον καὶ τότε καὶ νῦν λέγὡἔλεγον del. Schanz).

11. παραδοτέα —for the plur. see c. 72. 2.

12. οὐδὲ δίκαις κτλ .—nor must we decide by arbitration and words where we are ourselves being injured not in word. μή is caused by the prohibition of which the whole clause consists.

24 ἔφορος ὤν —in his capacity as ephor.

25 ἐς τὴν ἐ .—after ἐπεψήφιζεν.

26. κρίνουσι —decide in the assembly.

3. ὅτῳ μέν — the method of taking the division adopted seems to be introduced for this special occasion.

8. ἐγένοντο —amounted to.

12. ψῆφον ἐπαγαγεῖν —put the vote to them.

13. κοινῇ βουλευσάμενοι —arrive at a common decision before ...

18. τοῦ τὰς σπονδὰς λ .—the gen. of definition. Some edd. think these words spurious.

ἐγένετο ... προκεχωρηκυιῶν —lit. took place in the fourteenth year of the thirty years' truce when it had lasted (so long, sc. ἐς τοσοῦτον), i.e. in the fourteenth year of its course.

21. τὰ Εὐβοϊκά —see c. 23. 4 and 114.

1. οἱ γάρ —now begins the so-called πεντηκονταετία, or sketch of the growth of Athenian power in the half century between the battle of Mycale (479 B. C.) and the beginning of the war (431 B.C.). This sketch continues to c. 118. 2; and it consists of two parts: (1) to c. 96—how they obtained the leadership (ἡγεμονία)—or, as he says here, ἦλθον ἐπὶ τὰ πράγματα ἐν οἷς ηὐξήθησαν; (2) to c. 118—how the leadership was transformed into an empire—ἐν οἵῳ τρόπῳ κατέστἡἡ ἀρχή), c. 97. 2.

4. ναυσί —Salamis (480). πεζῷ —Plataea (479).

7. διεφθάρησαν — by Leotychides, the Spartan king, and Xanthippus, father of Pericles.

11. οἱ ... ξύμμαχοι —probably there was no formal treaty, but ξύμμαχοι is used because they were fighting side by side with the Athenians. (There is no need to remove ξύμμαχοι with Wilamowitz.)

14. ἐπιχειμάσαντες —the winter of 479-478 B C. The history of Herodotus ends with the fall of Sestos.

19. εὐθύς —in autumn of 479.

ὅθεν = ἐκεῖθεν οἷ. Cf. Soph. Trach. 701 ἐκ δὲ γῆς ὅθεν | προύκειτ’, ἀναζέουσι, from the earth where it was strewn, for ὅπου. The omission of antecedent before ὅθεν is not very rare; e.g 2.94 τροπαῖον ἔστησαν ὅθεν ἀναγαγόμενοι ἐκράτησαν, for ἐνταῦθα ὅθεν. The places are Salamis, Troezen and Aegina.

21. κατασκευήν —stock, goods, of all kinds.

22. ἀνοικοδομεῖν —in the autumn of 479.

24. βραχέα —only a small remnant, of the wall round the city left by the Persians.

1. ἦλθον πρεσβείᾳ = ἐπρεσβεύσαντο, the sociative dat. as in naval and military expressions; but there is no other example of this phrase and hence the variant readings.

τὰ μὲν κτλ .—partly because etc. μήτε not οὔτε because apprehension is implied.

5. τὸ πλῆθος ὅ —see c. 14. 2.

6. γενομένην —for the order see c. 11. 3.

8. εἱστήκει —sc. τείχη.

9. τὸ βουλόμενον (= τὴν βούλησιν) καὶ ὕποπτον — see c. 36. 1. ἐς τοὐς Ἀ. certainly belongs to δηλοῦντες and means before the assembly. For δηλοῦν in this use cf. c. 82. 1.

11. ὠς δὲ τοῦ β .—but on the ground that, still depending on ἠξιουν .

13. ἀπὸ ἐχυροῦ ποθεν ... ὁρμᾶσθαι —to use any stronghold as a base of operations. ποθεν by attraction for που.

νῦν — lately. Herod. 9.33 fol. tells us how the Persian general Mardonius made Thebes his headquarters.

15. ἀναχώρησίν τε καὶ ἀφορμήν —as a place to retreat to or advance from, abstract for concrete.

24. ἱκανὸν ἄρωσιν —for the pred. adj. cf. 2.75 ᾔρετο τὸ ὕψος τοῦ τείχους μέγα. The aor. (see crit. note) is necessary: the pres. would mean so long as.

25. ἀναγκαιοτάτου —cf. c. 2. 2 .

πάντας —on this the Schol. notes αὐτοὐς καὶ γυναῖκας καὶ παῖδας. It is therefore evident that he did not find these words in the text. Mr. Forbes defends the words as ‘forcible,’ and adds that the note may only mean that the words καὶ ... παῖδας in the text themselves explain παντας. Steup finds something wrong with their ‘force,’ rightly saying that καὶ οἰκέτας is missing after παῖδας: e.g. Diodorus xi. 40 says συνελαμβάνοντο τῶν ἔργων οἵ τε παῖδες καὶ αἱ γυναῖκες καἱ καθόλου πᾶς ξένος καὶ δοῦλος; but the details of his account are not drawn wholly from Thuc. The second point raised in defence is not borne out by the scholia to Thuc.

26. τοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει —cf. c. 64. 2: in contrast with those away from Attica.

3. τἆλλα ... τἀκεῖ —the rest, namely what was to be done there: an intentionally vague and mysterious suggestion of cunning, both being object of πράξοι. The order throws emphasis on both. The Athenians liked such oracular remarks from those whom they regarded as ξυνετοί: this style reflected the manner of the Delphic oracle, the gnomic poets, the sages and early philosophers.

6. ἀρχάς — magistrates.

11. ὡς —for ὅπως, how (not ‘that’).

13. διὰ φιλίαν αὐτοῦ —αὐτοῦ objective: the reason of this favour was, no doubt, that Them. was regarded at Sparta as a protector from the Persians: they owed him gratitude for the Athenian fleet; cf. c. 74. 1 .

τῶν δὲ ἄλλων κτλ .—Classen makes ἀφικνουμένων substantival; and renders καὶ σαφῶς quite positively (ἐπεὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ἀφικνούμενοι , visitors— arrivals, as they say—καὶ σαφῶς κατηγόρουν). The contrast to this subject will then be σφῶν αὐτῶν ἄνδρας below. Others render ‘(all) the other (visitors) arriving and announcing.’ In either case there is probably an allusion to τῶν ξυμμάχων ἐξοτρυνόντων c. 90. 1 in τῶν δὲ ἄλλων: these ‘others’ were persons afraid of Athens.

15. τειχίζεται —sc. τὸ τεῖχος.

18. οἵτινες χρηστοί —parts of εἰμί are often omitted in short rel. sentences.

24. ἧκον —were come.

29. ἐπεστάλη —impersonal.

1. τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις —i.e. ταῖς ἀρχαῖς (c. 90. 5).

4. εἰ δέ τι κτλ —a claim to complete recognition as an equal. τι=‘in regard to any matter:’ ὡς πρὸς κτλ. lit. to go in future as to men who could discern both their own interests and the common interests of the Greeks. ἰέναι depends on εἶπεν in sense of ἐκέλευσεν: ὡς πρὸς δ. is placed early so as to make it emphatic, and the emphasis must be marked in translating. There is no reason for interfering with the text here: προδ (see crit. note) is only a slip for πρὸς δ.

10. ἔφασαν —sc. the Athenian ambassadors.

11. βουλεύεσθαι —the attraction of the verb of short rel. sentences in O.O. into infinitive is less rare in Gk. than in Lat.: Thuc. has several examples, e.g. 2.102 λέγεται ... ὅτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι. This sentence stands as accus. of respect to οὐδενὸς κτλ.

14. καὶ ἰδίᾳ κτλ .—and for the Athenians themselves and with a view to (the interests of) the allies in general it would be beneficial. The position of the allies would be secure in the general council if Athens was strong. (This passage has been much discussed: (1) Classen takes τοῖς πολίταις with ἐς τοὺς π. ξυμμάχους also, and understands, ‘would be of more advantage to the Athenians (both) separately and with regard to their relations with the allies.’ But it is rightly objected that the advantage of the fortification cannot be limited to the Athenians, who want to prove that it is good for the allies too (cf. c. 91. 4 τὰ κοινά). Steup deletes ἄμεινον εἶναι, and is thus able to transl. the καὶ ἰδίᾳ κτλ. both for the A. themselves and for the allies. But there is no decisive objection to the text as it stands. It is true that we expect ίδίᾳ τε or καί (‘both’) ἰδίᾳ; cf. τά τε σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ... καἱ τὰ κοινά: but the omission and the unusual ἐς τούς instead of dative serve to make the allusion to ‘the allies’ a climax; καί=‘and in fact.’)

15. ὠφελιμώτερον ἔσεσθαι —the argument is that this, like the earlier actions of Athens, was done ἐπ’ ὠφελίᾳ, not only for Athens but for the Greek allies in general. Cf. c. 73. 2.

οὐ γάρ —this alludes to all the allies quite as much as to Athens: they would feel that the right to strengthen themselves was vindicated by Athens, thus all would be on an equal footing in the common council and their views would be equally respected.

18. ἔφη —Themistocles.

22. γνώμης παραινέσει —sc. ε·πί, to recommend a resolution to the Athenian assembly, i.e. to give advice. τῷ κοινῷ depends on παραινέσει. δῆθεν is of course ironical.

25. τὰ μάλιστα —best taken with ἐν τῷ τότε, at that time more than at any other.

4. οἱ γὰρ θεμέλιοι —the upper part of the wall was of brick (πλίνθοι), but there was a lower course of stone. Cf. Dem. de Cor..299 οὐ λίθοις ἐτείχισα τὴν πόλιν οὐδὲ πλίνθοις ἐγώ.

5. ξυνειργασμένων —shaped for fitting together.

6. στῆλαι —fragments of some of these belonging to the walls of Themistocles have been found. Hicks, Man. p. 13.

8. πανταχῇ —the extension did not include the SW. side of the city. For μείζων cf. c. 90. 3 .

10. κινοῦντες ἠπείγοντο —disturbed in their haste: κινεῖν is specially used of things that should not be interfered with.

12. ὑπῆρκτο δ’ αὐτοῦ —a beginning had been made on it; αὐτοῦ is neut. = ‘the work.’

13. ἐπὶ τῆς ... ἦρξε —during his office of archon, which he had held for a year at Athens. It is not necessary to understand by κατ’ ἐνιαυτόν annually, which complicates the grammar of the sentence. κατά, with words dcnoting time, is not always distributive. The year is now thought to be 482 B.C.

15. λιμένας —Piraeus, Zea, Munychia.

16. καὶ αὐτούς —and that the A., having once become a naval people, were in a very advantageous position for the acquisition of power. (Classen understands προφέρειν as fut. in sense.)

18. τῆς γὰρ δή —as often, there is an ellipse here; in full the sense is ‘he naturally thought of this, for,’ etc.

19. τὴν ἀρχὴν εὐθὺς ξυγκατεσκεύαζεν —at once began to help them to lay the foundation of their empire. This seems, on the whole, better than the version preferred by Classen and others, ‘prepared to begin ( ἀρχήν) the building,’ in which ξυν‐ is left obscure, and is, in fact, variously explained; and ἀρχήν (cf. c. 96. 2) is strange for ἔργον. The allusion is to the whole period after Salamis.

21. νῦν ἔτι —generally supposed to have been written after the destruction of the walls of Piraeus by Lysander in 404 B.C. There is, however, no certainty in the matter; cf. 93.2.

22. δύο γὰρ ἅμαξαι —this is supposed to mean that wagons in two rows drawing up stones from opposite ends met and passed one another on the wall (Classen); or, much better— because the idea of Classen could not possibly be carried out in building—the wagons worked from one end up an incline, and after discharging their load turned and passed the laden wagons still coming along the wall. (So already Procopius.) It is almost incredible, however, that Thuc. should have intended this Greek to represent (1) two rows of wagons (2) passing along the wall, and (3) the one set returning empty. But I have no other explanation to offer. Some suppose that two wagons worked on the level and deposited stones ready for the building on either side; perhaps this does prove τὸ πάχος τοῦ τείχους.

24. ἐντὸς δέ —i.e. the inside was not filled with clay and small stones, but large blocks were cut and fitted and fastened together on the outside by iron clamps.

25. ἐντομῇ —by cutting into them, so that the ends could fit together and overlap. This is much better than ἐν τομῇ, which cannot=‘at the ends.’

28. οὗ διενοεῖτο —i.e. εκείνου δ διενοεῖτο τελεῖν.

1. ἐπιβουλάς —an ὲπιβουλή would lead to an ἐπιβολή: Thuc. as often gives to the cause the meaning of its effect: there is no need to alter the text, despite the gloss in the Schol.

2. ἀχρειοτάτων —in its strict military sense.

16. ξυνέπλεον —it is not clear whether this expedition took place in 478 B.C. or in the early spring of 477. The Athenian leaders were Aristides and Cimon.

21. ἐν τῇδε τῇ ἡ .—during the command of Pausanias. ἡγεμονία refers to his leadership, not to the Spartan ‘hegemony’; see e.g. c. 128. 7. The story of Pausanias is given in cc. 128130. Some, to improve the sense, connect these words with the sentence that follows; see crit. note.

24. καὶ ὅσοι κτλ .—see c. 89. 2; those who had revolted from Persia after Mycale.

27. γίγνεσθαι —the pres., if correct, implies that the change could not be made in a minute.

κατὰ τὸ ξυγγενές —they were not all Ionians, but the greater number of them were.

9. ἐφαίνετο —it is not necessary to supply a subject such as ἡ ἀρχή: the lit. rendering is ‘an imitation of despotism was apparent (was to be seen)’; so in 2. 65. 9 ἐγίγνετο λόγῳ μὲν δημοκρατία, ἔργῳ δὲ ... ἀρχή, nominally a democracy was being formed.

10. καλεῖσθαι —before the court at Sparta.

14. τῶν μὲν ἰδίᾳ ... ηὐθύνθη —was punished for the injuries he had privately inflicted on any person. τινα is prob. masc., the sing. being used for the plur. as elsewhere, e.g. c. 40. 5; πρός τινα, in certain respects. seems flat, and τινα as neut. plur. is avoided where it is ambignous.

15. τὰ δὲ μέγιστα —those against the state. internal accus. to ἀδικεῖν .

17. ἐδόκει —sc. τοῦτο.

23. οἱ ἐξιόντες —cp. c. 77. 6; the pres. of the succession of commanders.

χείρους — corrupted.

27. ἐπιτηδείους =φίλους .

2. ἔταξαν —cf. Ath. Pol. c. 23 τοὺς φόρους οὗτος (Aristides) ἦν ὁ τάξας ταῖς πόλεσιν τοὑς πρώτους ἔτει τρίτῳ μετὰ τὴν ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχίαν—in 478-77. Trans. ‘assessed the contributions both of the states that were to provide money and of those,’ etc.—not ‘fixed which of the states,’ which overlooks the technical use of τάσσειν, rate.

5. ὧν =ἐκείνων ἅ, gen. of cause.

6. Ἑλληνοταμίαι ... ἀρχή —ἀρχή is pred., ‘as an office,’ and the verb is attracted into its number. Only Athenians could hold the office. They were ten in number, and were elected annually in the Eeclesia, one from each tribe See Sandys' note on Ath. Pol. c. 30.2.

9. ὁ πρῶτος φόρος ταχθείς —for the order cf. c. 11. 3. The sum is thought, on the evidence of the extant lists of the quota of 1/60th paid to Athena, to be impossibly large; and Classen therefore considered the whole passage interpolated. Perhaps the sum given was assessed, but not realised.

11. Δῆλος —the treasury of the leagne was removed to Athens in 454 B.C.

14. βουλευόντων —co-ordinate with αὐτονόμων. ἀπό expresses the method.

τοσάδε ἐπῆλθον —the series of enterprises that are about to be noticed (c. 98-118); τοσάδε διεπράξαντο ὅσα ... ἐρεῖ Schol.

15. διαχειρίσει πραγμάτων —by the management (manipulation) of political affairs.

16. μεταξὺ τοῦδε τοῦ πολέμου καὶ τοῦ Μ .—between the Persian and Peloponnesian wars. Greek often proceeds in this manner from the nearer to the more remote.

ἅ —the antecedent is τοσάδε. ἐγένετο stands as the passive of ποιῶ .

20. τοὺς αἰεὶ προστυγχάνοντας ἐν ἑκάστῳ —who in the several incidents came in contact with them as enemies (‘took part with the allies’ as some understand προστυγ. does not seem to be supported by the usage of the word; it occurs only here in Thuc.).

21. αὐτά —i.e. ἃ ἐγένετο κτλ.

23. χωρίον — period.

26. Ἑλλάνικος —this is the only instance in which Thuc. names another historian. H. of Mitylene was contemporary with Pericles, and in his Ἀτθίς (here called Ἀττικὴ ξυγγραφή) he included a sketch of historical events, and is said to have carried his work down at least to 406 B.C.

27. βραχέως τε καὶ τοῖς χρόνοις οὐκ ἀ .—Hellanicus must have been very scanty and inexact in the dates for this period, since this description would apply in a considerable degree to the better account that Thuc. proceeds to give. For the probable dates of the events to be noticed see Introd. p. xxix.

29. ἔχει —sc. ταῦτα.

1. Ἠιόνα —this place became later the port of Amphipolis. Miltiades is the victor of Marathon.

6. ὠ(/|κισαν αὐτοί —Scyros was parcelled out among Athenian settlers, or ‘cleruchs’; sessores veteres eiecit (Cimon), agros civibus divisit, says Nepos. (Cimon 2.5)

7. ἄνευ τῶν ἄ. Εὐβοέων —Carystus sided with Persia, but the rest of Enboea was in the league.

8. ξυνέβησαν —the Carystians.

12. τὸ καθεστηκός —not ‘recognised principles of right,’ but the existing arrangement’ which was that the allies retained their autonomy. δουλεία as in c. 8. 3.

13. ξυνέβη —sc. δουλωθῆναι, ἐδουλώθησαν. The Schol. supplies ἐδουλώθη, and acting on this hint Kruger iemoves ξυνέβη, so that ὡς ἑκάστη (nom.)=‘severally.’ This gives a simpler constn., out the text may be sound; and, as Classen says, ξυνέβη points to the ‘varying circumstances under which the loss of αυ·τονομία occurred.

16. λιποστράτιον —i.e. failure to furnish any ships as distinct from ἔκδειαι, which means that part only of the number was supplied.

17. ἀκριβῶς ἔπρασσον —were exacting in regard to φόρων ἔκδειαι, not quite ‘exacted (the tribute).’

18. λυπηροὶ ἦσαν —cf. c. 76. 1 : ταλαιπωρεῖν refers to νεῶν ἔκδειαι καὶ λιποστράτιον .

20. τὰς ἀνάγκας ‘their coercive measures.’ Cf. Aesch. PB 1052 ἀνάγκης στερραῖς δίναις, and see L & S S V ἀνάγκη 3.

22. ἄρχοντες —as rulers they were not popular as they had been at first. πως implies the omission of the details.

24. ὧν —i.e. ὅτι οὔτε ξυνεστράτευον κτλ.

27. χρήματα ἐτάξαντο ... φέρειν —the mid. denotes a reciprocal arrangement. χρήματα is prob. object of φέρειν and τὸ ἱκ. ἀνάλωμα, the sum that fell to them is in appos. to it.

1. ηὔξετο —Thuc. never uses the ordinary Attic form αὐξάνω.

10. ἀμφότερα —cf. c. 13. 5.

12. Φοινίκων —the Persian fleet consisted almost wholly of Phoenician ships.

τὰς πάσας —in all.

15. ἀντιπέρας —often used of the coast opposite an island, or vice versa.

16. ἃ ἐνέμοντο —see notes on p. 2, 11 and p. 44, 3. Here the two antecedents in different number require ἄ, which would otherwise be ὧν.

23. αὐτοὶ ἐκράτησαν —in contrast with the Ἠδωνοί—but the use of αὐτοί here, to which Steup objected, is strange. Notice how the precise sense of οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι shifts in this passage with the different verbs (e.g. πέμψαντες and διεφθάρησαν).

26. ὑπὸ τῶν Θρᾳκῶν ξυμπάντων οἷς —all the Thracians who objected, as distinct from the Edonians only οἷς πολέμιον ἦν replaces a τῶν + partic. limiting ξυμπάντων. Poppo's conj. ξύμπαντες, supported by Valla's transl. omnes, brings this passage more into harmony with Herod. 9.33 and other passages in which the Edonians alone are named as destroying the A. But if Thuc. meant the Edonians only, why should he say ὑπὸ τῶν Θρᾳκῶν ?

27. τὸ χωρίον κτιζόμενον —the founding of the place.

8 αὐτοῖς —ethic: it is constantly placed early in this manner.

περιοίκων —the free, but dependent Lacedaemonians descended from the pre-Dorian inhabitants and living in separate towns.

11. τότε —the descendants of the M. of former times who had been enslaved in the war made up most of the helots. πλεῖστοι is pred.; τότε refers to a well-known occasion, as elsewhere in Thuc. (often too, to some event that has been already recorded by Thuc.)—here to the first Messenian war, after which the Messenians became, as Tyrtaeus says, ὥσπερ ὄνοι μεγάλοις ἄχθεσι τειρόμενοι: δουλωθέντων is epithet, the order being justified by παλαιῶν, cf. c. 11. 3 κατεσχηκότος.

12. ἐκλήθησαν —came to be called; cf. c. 2. 4 . οἱ πάντες , sc. Εἵλωτες .

16. καθελόντες —this and the following aor. partic. are what are called ‘timeless,’ i.e, they denote merely the act, not time anterior to the verb. This happens only when the leading verb is in aorist. Cf. the constn. with ἔτυχον ἔλαθον, ἔφθασα.

17. χρήματά τε κτλ .—the order is ταξάμενοι αὐτίκα ἀποδοῦναι χ. ὅσα ἔδει καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν φέρειν(χ. ὅσα ἔδει), and χ. ὅσα ἔδει is the common object and so is put first. Note the aor. of one act and the pres. of a system. (It is certainly wrong to make ἀποδοῦναι depend only on ἔδει and to render καί also. This would mean that they were always to pay as much as the indemmty now exacted).

23. ξυμμάχους —in virtue of the alliance under Sparta still formally existing in spite of the Athenian hegemony.

24. οἱ δ’ ἦλθον —there was opposition at Athens to the proposal, but Cimon's view was that Sparta on land was as necessary to Greece as Athens on sea: Greece was ‘lamed’ while Sparta was tied down (Plut. Cim 16 ).

27. τοῖς δέ —edd. are divided as to whether this refers to the Athenians who fell short of their reputation, or to the Lac., i.e. whether to transl. (1) ‘but in their case (the Ath.) it gradually appeared that there was a deficiency in this (viz. τοῦ τειχομαχεῖν δυνατοὺς εἶναι),’ as they did not succeed in taking Ithome; or (2) ‘whereas it was apparent to them (the Lac.) that they lacked skill in this’—so that the full form would be ὅτἱοἱ μὲν Ἀθηναῖοι) ... τοῖς δἓΑακεδαιμονίοις). This seems better. The reading τῆς of the Schol. is prob. only a conjecture. ἐνδεᾶ is again the plur, adj. for sing. (=ἔνδεια). Thuc. might have said τοῦτο ἐνδεὲς ἐφαίνετο in the same sense.

2. βίᾳ γάρ —for otherwise (had they been competent τειχομαχεῖν) they would have captured it by assault—and would not have had to turn the siege into a blockade. Cf. on c. 11. 1.

8. ἡγησάμενοι — considering; so often in the aor.: they reflected ὅτι οι μὲν Δωριεῖς, οἱ δὲ Ἴωνες (Schol.).

μή τι κτλ .—this depends on δείσαντες, the clause between being parenthetical; a not very common form of constn.; cf. Soph. Antig. 1278 τὰ δ’ ἐν δόμοις | ἔοικας ἥκειν καὶ τάχ’ ὄψεσθαι κακά, with Jebb's note.

9. νεωτερίσωσι —i e. by joining the helots. This would be an instance of their τολμηρὸν καὶ νεωτεροποιία.

12. ἐπὶ τῷ βελτίονι λόγῳ —for the better reason, viz. that they were no longer needed. Of course βελτίων implies a contrast with a suppressed κακίων αἰτία viz. τὸ ὑποψίαν τινὰ γενέσθαι

15. δεινὸν ποιησάμενοι =δ. ἡγησάμενοι: but δεινόν(‐ἄποιεῖν=to declare a thing intolerable.

23. δεκάτῳ ἔτει —this year (see chron. table p. xxx) would be 456 B.C.; but there are several reasons for thinking δεκάτῳ wrong; e.g. (1) we know from [Xen.] Ath. Pol. that the Messenians were reduced before the battle of Tanagra, which occurred in 457 B.C., nor is it possible that Sparta should have sent a large army out of the Pel. unless this were so; (2) with δεκάτῳ the chronological order of events is here only in this sketch of the rise of Athens interrupted to notice an event that occurred after events that are still to be noticed. Hence Kruger proposed τετάρτῳ, supposing that Thue. wrote Δ which was taken for the initial letter of δεκάτῳ instead of the sign for four. Unfortunately, in view of the fact that Cimon was not sent to Sparta until after the capitulation of Thasos, and that then ἐμηκύνετο ο· πόλεμος, it is doubtful if four years is long enough.

28. εἶναι —the infin. in O.O. for ἔστω δοῦλος of O.R. This infin is particularly eommon in the terms of treaties.

3. Ἰθωμήτα —Doric ending, recalling the original.

5. κατ’ ἔχθος ἤδη —closely together,=κατά (‘in consequence of’) τὸ ἤδη γεγενημένον ἔ.

ἐς Ναύπακτον —the settlement proved most important to Athens in the Pel. War; they were expelled from Naupactus by Sparta at the end of it, and lived dispersed until Epaminondas befriended them in 370 B.C.

12. ἕσχον —ingressive. The possession of Megara and its ports was of the utmost value to Athens, hecause they thus blocked the roads from Pel. to Attica and Boeotia.

20. ὑπέρ — above, i.e. further inland.

22. Ἀρταξέρξου —the suceessor of Xerxes.

4. Ἁλιᾶς —nom. Ἁλιῆς or ‐εῖς (cf. Δωριεύς). The object of Athens was to begin a plan of connecting up the coast from the Saronic G. to the G. of Argos.

19. πρότερον with ἐπικούρους.

21. κατέλαβον —the heights command the Megarid.

28. ἐκ τῆς π. —c. 8. 2.

29. οἵ τε πρεσβύτατοι καὶ οἱ ν. —those over fifty or under twenty did not as a rule serve outside Attica: here περίπολοι (18-20) and οἱ ὑπὲρ πεντήκοντα ἔτη γεγονότες, as Classen points out, are meant

3. αὐτοί —subj. of ἔλασσον ἔχειν.

6. κακιζόμενοι =ψεγόμενοι (Schol.).

8. ἡμέραις —with ἐλθόντες ἀνθίστασαν. The dat. is much better than accus. taken with παρασκευασάμενοι.

15. προσβιασθέν —driven to it, viz. πρὸς τὸ ὑποχωρεῖν (to take οὐκ ὀλίγον as adverbial and qualifying προσβιασθέν with Steup is very forced). Others explain πρὸς τὸ ἐσπεσεῖν κτλ. which on account of διαμαρτὸν τῆς ὁδοῦ ἐσέπεσεν (=pass of ἐσβάλλω) is less likely.

16. ᾧ ἔτυχεν —sc. ὄν.

19. εἶργον —sc. αὐτούς. τοῖς ὁ. is dat. of means.

22. τὸ πλῆθος —the main body.

25. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη —these are not the two parallel ‘Long Walls’ or ‘Long Legs’ so familiar, but (1) the northern or τὸ ἔξωθεν τεῖχος running to Piraeus, and (2) the wall to Phalerum, τὸ Φαληρικὸν τεῖχος. The third wall, parallel to the northern wall, and called τὸ διὰ μέσου or τὸ νότιον τεῖχος was added some years later. (Steup supposes that all three walls are here meant, the two to Piraeus heing included in τὸ ἐς Πειραιᾶ . This is contrary to Andoc. de pace 37 and Plat. Gorg. p. 455 E, and in 2.13. 7 it is not likely that Thuc. means both walls by τὸ μακρόν, esp. as immediately afterwards he uses the plur.)

28. Δωριᾶς —i.e. the territory of the Dorians. The names of the towns in this distriet are variously given by different authors; but no doubt the three places here mentioned are the most important.

3. Νικομήδους —brother of Pausanias. The Lac. must have crossed the Corinthian (‘Crisaean’) gulf.

9. ἀπεχώρουν —began to ...

15. δύσοδος —i.e. the passes are difficult.

20. τὸ δέ τι —τὸ δέ is ‘on the other hand’ (cf. τὰ μὲν ... τὰ δέ), and τι in some measure (cf. οὔ τι in Plato).

22. ἐπῆγον —were egging them on.

25. πανδημεί —i.e. all liable to serve who remained at Athens.

28. νομίσαντες δὲ κτλ .—νομίσαντες and ὑποψίᾳ are the emphatic words (Forbes).

8. φόνος ... πολύς —see Hicks, Man. Gk. Hist. Inscr. p. 23 Cimon, who had been banished after the return from Ithome (c. 102), was recalled after this defeat on the motion of Pericles. Plato ( Mener.) and Demosth. speak of the battle of Tanagra as indecisive. Plato also misrepresents the ostracism of Cimon in the Gorgias.

11. διὰ Γερανείας —a good proof of the severity of the defeat is that the Athenians did not attempt to hold the passes against the returning Lac.

14. Μυρωνίδου —cf. c. 105. 4 .

26. τὸ νεώριον —Gythium. This Chalcis is in Aetolia.

1. ἐν ἀποβάσει τῆς γῆς =ἐς τὴν γῆν ἀποβάντες.

5. ἰδέαι — vicissitudes, διἁφοροι πόλεμοι, οἷον ... νῖκαι καὶ ἧτται (Schol.).

12. ἄλλως —μάτην (Schol.).

19. Προσωπίτιδα —an island formed by one of the mouths of the Nile and a canal.

24. ἤπειρον —sc. ἐποίησε.

27. πολεμήσαντα —there is no need to read πολεμησάντων with Cobet; cf. such expressions as νοσεῖ τὰ πράγματα: edd. quote Herod. 7.33 ε·ς τοῦτο θράσεος ὰνήκει τὰ )Ελλήνων πράγματα.

3. ἐν τοῖς ἔλεσι —the Nile Delta.

5. καὶ ἅμα —the coustn. changes from suhord. to principal form: strictly we require καὶ ἅμα ὅτι κτλ.

7. τὰ πάντα ἔπραξε —i.e. τὴν ἀπόστασιν ἐποίησε τῆς Αἰγύπτου (Schol.); see c. 104. 1.

11. Μενδήσιον κέρας —one of the Nile mouths named after a town Mendes. κέρας καλεῖ Νείλου τὸ στόμα (Schol.).

12 εἰδότες —after τριήρεις, of the crews, as often; e.g. vi. 104. 1.

20. βασιλέως —he belonged prob. to the Scopadae, one of the two branches of the royal house of Thessaly.

φεύγων —living in exile.

25. ὅσα —sc. κρατεῖν ἐδύναντο. See Jebb on Soph. OT 347.

26. ἐκ τῶν ὅπλων —i.e. outside the camp. τὰ ὅπλα is properly the space in front of a camp where the arms were piled: so commonly in Xen.

5. Περικλέους —first mention of him (year 454 B.C.).

9. τῆς Ἀκαρνανίας depends on Οἰνιάδας.

15. ἔσχον —abstained from war with Greeks.

18. ἀπ’ αὐτῶν —out of the 200.

19. μεταπέμποντος —Thuc. often uses this verb in act., while other authors use the mid.: so too μεταχειρίζω, πειρῶ.

22. Κίτιον —in Cyprus (now Chitti)

23. ὑπὲρ Σ —off S., with ἐναυμάχησαν.

25. ἁμφότερα —see c. 13. 5.

26. αἱ ... πάλιν [αἱ] ἐλθοῦσαι —which had returned from Egypt. αἱ is to be omitted.

5. ἐγγενομένου —cf. c. 80. 4 .

6. φευγόντων —after the battle of Oenophyta, the democratic party in Boeotia had driven out the anti-Athenian oligarclis. But the exiles had recovered some of their lost power.

13. καὶ ἀνδραποδισαντες —there is no sufficient ground for omitting these words (see crit. note); that a scribe copied them from c. 98 is very unlikely. It is remarkable that Athens should have taken such drastic measures against a place in the heart of Greece and so near.

14. καταστήσαντες —sc. ἐν αὐτῇ, unless ἐγ‐ should be read (if Thuc. wrote in the old Attic alphabet, ἐγ would be nearly identical with the last two letters of φυλακήν); cf. c. 115. 3.

15. Κορωνείᾳ —in this engagement Clineas, father of Alcibiades, was killed; and Tolmides himself.

17. γνώμης —i.e. sympathised with the oligarchs.

22. οἱ ἄλλοι —the other Boeotians, as well as those who had been driven out.

26. διαβεβηκότος —the gen. abs. in place of dat., throwing emphasis on the partic.; cf. 6.10 σφαλέντων δὲ (ἡμῶν) ... ταχεῖαν τὴν ὲπιχεἰρησιν ἡμῖν οί ἑχθροὶ ποιήσονται: gen. for nom. 8.76. 4; for accus. 2.8. 4.

9. Θριῶζε =ἐς τὸ Θριάσιον πεδίον (cf 2.19); Thria near Eleusis.

11. τὸ πλέον — further. Pleistoanax was banished from Sparta on his return, being thought to have taken a bribe to leave Attica (2.21 ).

15. ὁμολογίᾳ κατεστήσαντο —arranged their affairs under a convention. See Hicks Man. p. 33.

20. ἀποδόντες —for the aor. cf. c 101. 1.

28 τὴν πολιτείαν —this is the only case in which νεωτερίζω has an aceus. except a neut. pron. (τι, οὐδέν etc.).

5. Αῆμνον —Athenian colony.

6. τῶν δὲ Σαμίων —for the constn. cf. c. 72. 1.

8. τοῖς δυνατωτάτοις —the leading oligarchs in Samos. ξυμμαχίαν seems to be used somewhat loosely as applied to τοῖς δυνατωτάτοις.

10. εἶχε Σάρδεις —as satrap of Lydia.

13. τῶν πλείστων —most of them; the sense is not clear.

16. οἵ ἦσαν παρὰ σφίσιν —this seems to refer to Athenian ἐπίσκοποι who were sent out to superintend the affairs of the new democratic government of Samos.

18. παρεσκευάζοντο στρατεύειν —μετ’ αὐτοῦ (i.e. Pissuthnes) says the Schol.; and this note has strayed into the text of CG (see crit. note).

21. ταῖς μὲν ἑκ .—for the article cf. c. 10. 2.

24. τῶν Φοινισσῶν νεῶν —i.e. the Persian fleet that Pissuthnes might be expected to employ.

αἱ δ’ ἐπὶ Χίου —Sophocles the poet was στρατηγός of this sqnadron. See Jebb's Intr. to the Antigone.

25. περιαγγέλλουσαι βοηθεῖν —calling for the contingents they were entitled to. Chios and Lesbos were not entirely to he depended upon.

6. κρατοῦντες —being superior.

τρισὶ τείχεσι —intended to blockade the town on the three sides that did not face the sea. Why they built three separate walls is not explained.

10. ἐσαγγελθέντων —cf. δηλωθέντος c 74. 1, and for the plur. c. 7. 1.

ἐπ’ αὐτούς —i.e τοὺς Ἀθηναίους.

14. ἀφάρκτῳ —i.e. the Athenians had neglected to protect their naval station with a σταύρωμα.

21. πάλιν ταῖς ναυσί with κατεκλῄσθησαν.

23. Θουκυδίδου —it is not known who this Thuc. is, probably not the well-known politician, nor the historian. For Phormio see c. 64: after winning great victories he died about 428 B.C. Hagnon led the colony to Amphipolis in 437 B.C., and was again Strategus in 430 and 429 B.C. After the Sicilian disaster when an old man he was one of the ten πρόβουλοι.

27. ἀντίσχξιν —the advantage of this pres. form over the aor. of ἀντέχω (see crit. note) is that continuation of resistance is implied.

1. καθελόντες —for the aor. see c. 101. 3.

3. κατὰ χρόνους —at fixed intervals.

9. πρόφασις —see c. 23. 6.

11. ὅσα ἔπραξαν οἱ Ἕλληνες —in spite of the verbal similarity to c. 97. 1, Thuc. here includes everything related between cc. 89 and 118.

12. ἐν ἔτεσι πεντήκοντα —i.e. between 480 and 431 B.C Perhaps it is in order to round off the period to fifty years exactly that Thuc. here says μεταξὺ τῆς Ξέρξου ὰναχωρήσεως whereas at c 89 he began ἐπειδὴ Μῆδοι ἀνεχώρησαν—which is a different event.

14. ἐν οῖς —since the period begun at c. 97. In such a summary as Thuc. here gives we need not look for absolute accuracy in the details: he is giving the useful landmarks in the chronology. Think of the retreat of Xerxes, he says, and think of the beginning of the war, you have just fifty years, and a convenient plan for remembering how the power of Sparta among the alhes was lost and that of Athens was gained.

16. αὐτοί —Athens, independently of her empire.

18. ἐπὶ βραχύ —to a small extent, ec. 90; 107; 112; 114.

19. ὄντες μὲν πρὸ τοῦ μὴ ταχεῖς —the μή is unusual: ‘it is as if he had said ὡς εἰκὸς μὲν ἦν καὶ πρὸ τοῦ μὴ ταχεῖς ὄντας’ (Croiset). i.e Thuc. wants to represent a general cause persons who had been slow before would naturally be slack in such a case: this connexion of cause and effect is well brought out by the μή. Cf. next note hut one. (Goodwin, M.T. 685 offers a curious explanation.)

21. τὸ δέ τι —see c. 107. 4.

τολέμοις οὶκείοις —the use of the plur. where only the Messenian War is meant shows that Thuc. is still representing the eause as a general one that would naturally have the effect mentioned.

22. πρὶν δή , ‘until at length,’ with past indic. often introduces the decisive event.

23. τῆς ξυμμαχίας —esp. the Corinthians.

26. καθαιρετέα —fem.

1. αὐτοῖς —as distinct from their allies: see c. 87. 6 .

5. ἄμεινον ἔσται —formula used in inquiring of oracles, and ἄμεινον often in the metrical replies.

7. αὐτός —the oracle said ξυλλήψομαι αὐτός.

8. αὖθις with παρακαλέσαντες only; this is the cougress referred to in c. 87. 4. The earlier meeting implied is that of c. 67. 3.

18. παρόντες δὲ καὶ τότε —as they had already expressed their views to the allies as well as to Sparta, their presence at this second meeting is specially mentioned. (There is no sufficient ground for rejecting παρόντες. Steup conjectures παροξύνοντες .)

19. τελευταῖοι ἐπελθόντες —cf. c. 1.67.5.

21. οὐκ ... ἔτι —the charges (1) that the Lac. were neglecting their allies in not deciding to fight Athens, and (2) that they had not brought the allies together to vote on a clear issue, viz. on the question of war, had been brought by the Corinthians in the earlier assembly (c. 68 ).

23. ἐς τοῦτο =ἐς τὸ ψηφίσασθαι τὸν πόλεμον.

24. γάρ implies ‘otherwise we should blame them.’

25. τὰ ἴδια ἐξ ἴσου νέμοντας —while attending to their own interests as much as others do. τὰ ἴδια is the interests of Sparta in contrast with τὰ κοινά, the common interests of the confederates. ἐξ ἴσου=with as much care as others of the confederates (esp. the Corinthians) attend to their own interests. νέμω is here not ‘assign,’ but ‘direct, manage,’ as often in trag.: how distinet the two senses are may be seen from Soph. OC 237-240 γῆς τῆσδ’ ἧς ἐγὼ κράτη τε καὶ θρόνους νέμω μήτ’ ἐσδέχεσθαι μήτε προσφωνεῖν τινα ... μήτε χερνιβὂς νέμειν. Here νέμοντας τὰ ἴδια has reference to αὐτοὶ ἐψηφισμένοι τὸν πόλεμόν εἰσι, and προσκοπεῖν τὰ κοινὰ to ἡμᾶς ἐς τοῦτο ξυνήγαγον.

26. προσκοπεῖν —not to foresee, but to consider before others, in a higher degree, in contrast with ἐξ ἴσου and corresponding to the προ‐ in προτιμῶνται.

ἐν ἄλλοις —the Schol takes this as neut., and so many edd., ‘in other respects’ or ‘on other occasions’: but some prefer the masc., and this is better, ‘among others,’ i.e. when the Lac. send representatives to a meeting in any allied city.

27. ἐκ πάντων —above all (masc,; some render ‘by all,’ which is less likely).

28. ἐνηλλάγησαν —only here in this sense, συνέμιξαν καὶ ὡμίλησαν (Schol.). Cities on the coast who have had commercial dealings with Athens are meant.

2. κατῳκημένους —Thuc., like Herod., uses this verb in mid. as well as in act.: but only the perf. and plup. in mid. For the accus, Kruger quotes Herod. 4.33 κατοικημένον τὴν ... νῆσον. ἐν πόρῳ —in the track of trade: this constn. is strange after τὴν μεσόγειαν and prob. τήν is meant to extend over μὴ ἐν πόρῳ (sc. γῆν).

4. τὴν κατακομιδήν —i e. for exportation; πάλιν qualifies ἀντίληψιν; cf. e.g. ἡ πάλιν κατάβασις vii. 44. τήν of course goes with both nouns.

8. ποτε with προελθεῖν.

11. βουλεύεσθαι depends on χρή.

13. ἀνδρῶν γὰρ σωφρόνων —in sense subord. to ἀγαθῶν δὲ κτλ.

ἐστιν, εἰ μὴ ἀδικοῖντο —instances of this idiom in Sophocles are given by Bayheld on Antig 666: Goodwin M.T. 555: Spratt on Thuc. iii 9. This opt. is esp. suited to such γνῶμαι because it puts the case in the most general way possible. Jebb on Soph. Antig. l.c. ὰλλ’ ὃν πόλις στήσειε, τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν.

14. ἀδικουμένους =εἰ ἀδικοῖντο. The speaker impresses on the allies of the interior that they too are involved when those of the coast are wronged. The change of case (ἀδικουμένων might have been written) makes the partic. more emphatic.

15. εὖ δὲ παρασχόν —this clause added to ἀνδρῶν ἀγαθῶν rather than to σωφρόνων shows that the ἀνδρεία meant is not opposed to the σωφροσύνη.

16. καὶ μήτε ... ἐπαίρεσθαι —this clause gives the negative of ἐκ πολέμου πάλιν ξ. and μήτε ... ἁδικεῖσθαι that of ἀδικουμένους ... πολεμεῖν in chiastic form. Thuc. is fond of restating in a negative a point just made; while his style is brief, there is yet a tendency to redundaney. See Intr. p. xlvii. τῷ ήσύχῳ τῆς εἰρήνης is according to the constant habit of substituting the adj. neut. for subst. in giving the quality of a person or thing. The form ἡσύχιος (see crit. note) is rarer, and as τὸ ἤσυχον occurs in 6.18 and 34, not to be preferred. ήδόμενον is in the sing. as if τινα had preceded.

19. ὀκνῶν —sc. πολεμεῖν. Some regard εἰ ἠσυχάζοι as a gloss, but if it is tautological after ὀκνῶν so is δῑ ὅπερ ὀκνεῖ after διὰ τὴν ἡδονήν .

22. πλεονάζων —ἐπαιρόμενος (Croiset).

ἐντεθύμηται ... ἐπαιρόμενος —the constn. as with οἶδα. Why the θράσος is ἄπιστον is explained in what follows.

23. γνωσθέντα — planned.

24. τυχόντα —luckily finding the enemy more ill-advised have been brought to a successful issue. It is difficult to choose between τυχόντα and τυχόντων, chanced to be, agreeing with ἐναντίων, but in such a matter the authority of CG is to be preferred (the Schol. read τυχόντα): for the same reason ἅ is best omitted after πλείω.

26. ἐνθυμεῖται γὰρ κτλ .—lit. no man by his confidence forms plans in the same spirit (ὀμοῖα=ὀμοίως) as he carries them but, i.e. a man may be confident when he makes a plan: it does not follow that he does not carry it out in the same spirit. Reiske's ὀμοίᾳ, with the same degree of confidence, makes the eonstruetion easier, but is not certainly necessary. ἔργῳ goes so closely with ἐπεξέρχεται that τῇ πίστει just before in a different relation to its verb is not felt to be awkward. The security with which the notion is formed gives place to apprehension, and so ‘we are found wanting.’ Hence τὰ καλῶς βουλευθέντα miscarry.

3. ήμεῖς δέ —the application of the general statements in e. 120. 3 .

5. ἀμυνώμεθα —aorist (fut.-perf.).

6. καταθησόμεθα —cf. τίθεσθαι c. 82. 6.

7. κατὰ πολλά —on many grounds.

9. ὁμοίως πάντας —all with equal readiness carrying out the orders given, i.e. in the field, as usual; and the edd. point out that the allusion is to the κύσμος for which the Dorians were famous. Cf. 5.66 . ίέναι ἐς τὰ παραγγελλόμενα occurs again in in. 55 in the sense to answer to a call. For ἰέναι ἐς of eager action cf. c. 1 .

12. ἐξαρτυσόμεθα —the reading of C is clearly right: there is no place here for the hortative subj.

τῶν ... χρημάτων —the treasure in the temples. These could only be treated as a loan.

15. ξένους —adj., those from the subject allies.

17. ἧσσον ἂν τοῦτο πάθοι —i.e. τὸ ὑπολαμβάνεσθαι μισθῷ μείζονι, because our men are not paid—it is the service of men, not money, that gives us our strength. τοῖς χρήμασι corresponds to ὠνητή.

19. ναυμαχίας —defining gen; ἁλίσκονται of course is pres. for fut., ‘they are lost.’ (Some see here a reference after the event to the battle of Aegospotami and the capture of Athens; but the τε shows that the sentence is a conclusion from what precedes; and Aegospotami was not the result of the cause there stated.)

εἰ δ’ ἀντίσχοιεν —supposing they should hold out, i.e. if they are not defeated at sea after all (meaning suppose we are defeated instead), we shall get the better of them in the end.

24. δ δ’ ἐ. ἐπιστήμῃ προύχουσι —the advantage that they have in point of skill. ὅ is aceus. of measure, and the dat. as usual gives the point of excellence (ὅ is not accus, of respect; and as to Antig. 208 τιμὴν προέξους) see Jehb's note). For the superiority of φύσις over διδαχή see c. 139. 2 .

25. καθαιρετόν — we can annul: καθαιρετέον would mean we must, which does not give a good antithesis to οὐκ ἃν γένοιτο. Again C alone has the correct form.

26. ἐς αὐτά —viz. ἐς τὸ μελετᾶν τὰ ναυτικὰ ἕως ἂν ἐς τὸ ἴσον καταστησώμεθα.

27. ἤ — otherwise.

εἰ οὐκ ... ἀπεροῦσιν ... οὐκ ἄρα δαπανήσομεν —in a bimembered sentence of this kind, οὐ is regularly used in the second clause if the verb is in indic., μή if the verb is in opt. The first clanse is logieally subordinate to the second. Cf. Andoc. 1.102 οὐκ οὖν δεινόν, εἰ ὑπὸ μὲν τούτων διὰ τοῦτ’ ἂν ἀπωλόμην ... ἐν ὑμῖν δὲ κρινόμενος ... οὑ σωθήσομαι ;

3. ἄρα —we then decide not, i.e. infer that this is the way to attain our objects.

4. αὐτά —this and αυτοῖς τούτοις refer to χρήματα.

6. ξυμμάχων τε ἀπόστασις κτλ .—such as revolt of allies, which means in the main withdrawal of the revenues that give them their strength, and erection of a hostile fortress in their country. The first ‘way of war’ was followed by Brasidas in 424 B.C.: the second was not used until 413 B C. (Decelea), but the Athenians had then long feared such an attempt. The context makes it clear that ἀπόστασις implies the bringing about of revolt.

11 ἐπὶ ῥητοῖς —in accordance with fixed conditions; cf. c. 13. 1: the meaning is explained in the following words.

13. ἐν ᾧ κτλ .—and in this case, i e. ‘and this being so, he who enters on war in a calm spirit is safer, whereas he who loses control of himself over it gets more falls.’ The meaning is ‘opportunities arise in war and have to be seized as they arise: it is not well for us to get excited now in thinking out plans of campaign—such cut and dried schemes generally miscariy—but what we must do is to enter on war calmly and take opportunities as they occur.’ ὀργή means excitement, not anger here; cf. 2.11. 7: οὐκ ἐλάσσω euphemism for πλείω, i.e. probably ἢ ὁ εὑοργήτως προσομιλήσας .

17. ἑκάστοις —each state.

πρὸς ἀντιπάλους —with an enemy equal to us (and not stronger)

18. οἰστόν —the position would be easy, i.e. there would be no need for us to combine.

20. κατὰ πόλιν =(πρὸς ἡμᾶς)κατὰ πόλιν, lit. as compared with us separately city by city. For ἔτι we expect πολύ, far more powerful, since we want a strong contrast after ἱκανοὶ πρὸς ξύμπαντας. ἔτι must be regarded as a meiosis (Conradt and Steup have proposed considerable changes, but the text appears to be sound)

21. καὶ ἁθρόοι —not only as a confederacy, but every tribe and every single town.

25. ἄντικρυς δουλείαν —downright slavery; cf. viii. 64 ἡ ἄντικρυς ἐλευθερία; the adv. qualifies noun though without the art., as in vii. 81 ού ξυσταδὸν μάχαις ἐχρῶντο .

26. δ καὶ κτλ .—the very mention of which as a possibility is disgraceful (Wilkins). ὅ is τὸ δουλεύειν .

27. καὶ πόλεις κτλ .—some edd. make this a second subject to ἐνδοιασθῆναι (Kruger, Classen, Croiset), which gives an excelleut sense: but the constn. is simpler if αἰσχρόν is made pred. to this—and that so many cities should be maltreated by one. Whichever be right, the ref. must be to the misery of political slavery imposed by Athens; and cannot, in view of the next sentence, and of ήλευθέρωσαν, opp. δουλείαν, apply to the present treatment of the confederacy.

28. ἐν ᾦ —in that case; cf. 122.1;=εἰ πόλεις τοσαίδε ... κακοπαθοῖμεν .

2. ἡμεῖς δέ —this is in contiast with οἴ=οἰ μὲν γὰῥπατέρες). αὐτό means τὴν ἐλευθερίαν implied in ἡλευθέρωσαν. ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς of course means for the Peloponnesiaus: and this clause implies ‘much less do we give freedom to all Greece’: hence there is no difficulty in supplying ἐν τῇ Ἑλλάδι to εγκαθεστάναι.

3. τύραννον δὲ ... καταλύειν —we allow a despotic state to establish itself in Greece; and yet we make a point of putting down despots in any single city. τοὺς ἐν μιᾷ, sc πόλει (which possibly has dropped out of the text), μονάρχους is opposed to τύραννον πόλιν ἐν Ἑλλάδι. The traditional policy of Sparta is alluded to.

5. ἴσμεν —sc. ἡμεῖς (of the speaker). The subject is not identical with that of ἀξιοῦμεν (the confederacy).

6. τάδε ... ἀπήλλακται —this policy is (=can possibly be) free from—viz. the policy of allowing an Athens to flourish. As it is not free from all three, it is exposed to at least one: hence there is no need for ἑνός after ξυμφορῶν: see p. 31 l. 5.

8. οὐ γὰρ δὴ πεφευγότες αὐτά —the rendering ‘we cannot suppose that you have avoided these evils only to’ etc. (Classen, Croiset, Forbes, etc), meaning by irony ‘we suspect that you have,’ cannot be right, since the previous sentence distinctly says, ‘you have not escaped all three of these ξυμφοραί.’ Hence we must transl. (with Kruger, Bohme, Steup): ‘For it is not the case that you are free from these errors in assuming that contempt which has proved ruinous to so many (δή strengthens πλείστους), and which from its tendency to trip men up, has received instead (sc. from prudent men) the opposite name of folly.’ Nothing is gained by preserving the jingle in καταφρόνησις and αφροσύνη, because (1) to a Greek writer such a jingle has some rhetorical merit; in English it is detestable and pointless; (2) though ἀφροσύνη is spoken of as the opposite (ἐναντίον) of καταφρόνησις, it is really only different, but early Greek thinkers on the meaning of terms often confuse the contiary with the contradictory. τὸ ἐναντίον ὄνομα is internal accus. to μετωνόμασται .

13. τοῖς νῦν —neut., and so μελλόντων and παροῦσι.

14. περί =ὑπέρ, with ἐπιταλαιπωρεῖν, i.e. προσθεῖναι τὸν πόνον (Schol.).

16. ἐκ τῶν πόνων τὰς ἀρετάς —famous characteristic of the Dorians. Cf. Hesiod, W. and D. 289 (Plat Rep. p. 364 D, Xen. Mem. 2.1.20) τῆς ἀρετῆς ἱδρῶτα θεοὶ προπάροιθεν ἔθηκαν, quoted by several edd ˙ in the Funeral Speech Pericles speaks of the ἐπίπονος ἄσκησις of the Spartans.

18. ἐξουσίᾳ —δυνάμει.

προφέρετε =προέχετε, only used in this way by Herod., Thuc., and poets.

21. κατὰ πολλά —three grounds for confidence are presently given.

22. αὐτοῦ —see c. 118. 3.

24. τὰ μὲν φόβῳ κτλ .—those who are not yet enslaved by the Athenians fear to be so (φόβῳ); those who are so already hope to regain their liberty (ὡφελίᾳ), Croiset. ὠφελίᾳ, dat. of motive, is, as Mr. Forbes says, here used for the idea (desire) of the thing rather than for the thing itself; he compares ἁρετή c. 33 and τιμή c. 75; and so elsewhere.

25. σπονδάς —c. 53. 2.

2. κοινῇ —in the common interest.

3. εἴπερ βεβαιότατον κτλ .—inasmuch as the surest ground (for taking common action) is that both cities and individnals have the same interests. This is the only natural way of taking the words, for the order does not allow καὶ πόλεσι καὶ ἰ. to go with βεβαιότατον, as Classen supposed (Stahl and others alter the text to make this constn. possible). The meaning is explained by οὖσι Δωριεῦσι κτλ.: it is the interest of every city and every individual member of the confederacy that Dorians should be protected from Ionians. (The MSS. have ταῦτα for ταὐτά, and this is transl. ‘since it is most certain that this course—to go to war—is to the interest of,’ etc.)

7. οὗ πρότερον ἦν τ .—in former times Dorians were recognised as supertor in war to Ionians. In such a rhetorical statement we need not look for any specific historical reference.

9. ὡς οὐκέτι ἐνδέχεται κτλ .—for it is now out of the question that we should wait (for common action by the confederacy), and that some of us (e g. we Corinthians) should now be suffering and others ... should shortly have the same experience. Cf. vii. 42 νομίσας οὐχ οἷόν τε εἶναι διατρίβειν οὐδὲ παθεῖν ὅπερ ὁ Νικίας ἔπαθεν.

16. αὐτοῦ —τοῦ πολέμου.

17. διὰ πλείονος —of time, in contrast with αὐτίκα.

ἐκ πολέμου μὲν κτλ .—the sentence becomes clear when τοῖς ἐς ἀνάγκην ἀφιγμένοις is supphed from above, i.e. where war becomes a necessity. πολεμῆσαι is ingressive.

23. διανοεῖσθαι —cf. c. 1. 1 .

4. τὸ πλῆθος —often of the greater number.

6. ἐκπορίζεσθαι ... ἑκάστοις —as the several states were to carry out a general resolution, it is best with Steup to take ἐκ, as passive and ἑκάστοις as agent. It is then unnecessary to read ἑκάστους.

8. καθισταμένοις — παρασκευαζομένοις (Schol.).

9 ἐνιαυτὸς μὲν οὐ δ., ἔλασσον δέ —this certainly emphasises the length of time occupied, in spite of their haste, and not the promptitude of the coufederacy; the latter would be inconsistent with all that precedes (c. 71. 4; 124. 1, and this section). Thuc. means clearly (it seems to me), ‘I was going to say a year was consumed: but no, it was less than that’; i.e. it was not much less. (1) In 2.2, if the text is sound, we read that the entry into Plataea took place at the very beginning of spring 431, and in the sixth month after the battle of Potidaea (see c. 62); and (2) we are further told that the first invasion of Attica was eighty days after the seizure of Plataea. Hence the whole time between the battle of Potidaea and the first invasion would be less than nine months, and to arrive at the length of time that separates the resolution of the confederacy from the first invasion, we must deduct the time occupied by the events narrated in cc. 63-88 and 118-125, which are:

1. The Athenians built a wall on north side of Potidaea and garrisoned it

2. χρόνῳ ὕστερον Phormio was sent from Attica with 1600 hoplites, and κατὰ βραχὺ προήει .

3. Phormio built a wall south of Potidaea.

4. The Corinthians called a meeting at Sparta. (At what exact stage of affairs this was done is not clear.)

5. The Spartans sent to Delphi.

6. The general meeting was held at Sparta, and the decision taken.

Hence the time would be much less than a year; and it is probable that the μηνὶ ἕκτῳ of 2.2 is somehow coriupt.

πρὶν ἐσβαλεῖν —under Archidamus. The account of it is in 2.19.

12. ἐπρεσβεύοντο —following, as it turned out, the advice of Archidamus; see c. 82. He was afterwards blamed for not having been eager to begin the war.

18. τὸ ἄγος τῆς θεοῦ —i.e. those who were under the curse of Athena. The chief authorities for the story of Cylon and the Alcmaeonidae are, besides Thuc, Hdt. 5.71 (Thuc. differs from him, and is perhaps correcting his account), Plut. Sol. 12. The Ath. Pol. mit. shows that the attempt of Cylon preceded the legislation of Draco. ἄγος is a pollution under which a person, a house, or a community labours.

20. Κύλων ἦν —two scholia show that the following narrative was admired in antiquity for its clearness and smoothness; one says ‘The Lion laughed here.’

Ὀλυμπιονίκης —in 640 B.C. (see Sandys on Ath. Pol. init.).

21. τῶν πάλαι —part., ‘of his date’ (not, ‘of an ancient family’).

23. κατ’ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον —his expulsion is supposed to have occuried in 600 or 590 B.C.

24. χρωμένῳ —cf. c. 123. 1. Both act. and mid. are rare in Attic, the act sense being given by ἀναιρῶ or μαντεύομαι, the mid. by ἐπερωτῶ.

1. ἐπῆλθεν —the reading ἐπῆλθον has not enough MS. support to be acceptable; but in 5.49 all MSS. give Καρνει—α ετύγχανον ὄντα. In two other places in Thuc. all MSS. give plur. with neut. plur. subj.—5.26 ἁμαρτήματα εγένοντο; 6.62 ἐγένοντο ... εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατὸν τάλαντα. In Xen. the plur. is common.

4. τι προσήκειν —had some connexion.

7. ἔτι κατενόησε ... ἐδήλου —had not gone on to consider ... gave no information.

8. Διάσια —for the Athenians too have (their festival of Zeus) the Diasia, which is called the greatest festival of Zeus Meilichius, in contrast with other festivals of Zeus Meilichius. Of course καί before Ἀθηναίοις does not imply that the Pel. had Diasia, but Διάσια is a brachylogy for ἑορτὴ Διὸς Διάσια .

10. πανδημεί —by the whole people together, not in separate demes.

πολλὰ οὐχ ἱερεῖα, ἀλλ’ < ἁγνὰ > θ. ἐ .—Pollux 1.26 (2nd cent. A.D.) says ‘spices are also ealled “incense”: Thuc. calls them ἁγνὰ θύματα in contrast with τὰ αἱμάσσοντα καὶ σφαττόμενα,’ i.e. with ίερεῖα. Hence ἁγνά is to be read here. The Schol. says ‘cakes made in the shape of animals’ are meant. πολλοί of the MSS. will not do, because it is inconsistent with πανδημεί. (πολλοί without δέ could not= but many, as the Schol. suggests; and the Schol. eannot have read here πανδημεὶ ἑορτάζουσι, θύουσι δὲ πολλοί, which Stahl prints, since those are the very words of his note, and he would merely have copied out the text verbatim. Lastly θύματα ἐπιχώρια, meaning cakes or ‘incense,’ is not inconsistent with Xen. Anab. vii. 8, where we read that Xen. had sacrificed holocausts to Zeus Meilichius when at home: this cannot refer to the Diasia, but must mean another feast of Zeus Meilichius.)

14. αὐτούς —Cylon and his supporters, who had seized the acropolis.

προσκαθεζόμενοι —this form serves for the aor. as well as pres.

15. ἐγγιγνομένου —being spent over the matter. Cf. χρόνος ἐνέσται p. 61 l. 17.

17. τοῖς ἐννέα ἄρχουσι —Megacles the Alcmaeonid was one of them.

18. αὐτοκράτορσι —without reference to the assembly.

19. ἄριστα —adj., sc. εἶναι, like ἄμεινόν ἐστι, for this is merely plur. for sing.

τότε δέ —the ten στρατηγοί did not as yet exist, and the archons were appointed (not elected by lot) by the Areopagus. In the time of Thuc. their duties were almost entirely judicial.

26. τὸν βωμόν of Athena

1. ἀναστήσαντες =ἀναστῆναι πείσαντες, and on this depends ἐφ’ ᾧ, for which cf. c. 103. 1 .

τῶν Ἀθηναίων —partitive: see c. 9. 2.

5. ἐπὶ τῶν σεμνῶν θ. τοῖς βωμοῖς —at the altars of the Eumenides, probably the most sacred asylum at Athens. The shrine stood by the cleft in the NE. side of the Areopagus, where the Furies were established, after being reconciled to Athena. τοῖς βωμοῖς is however probably spurious; the order is suspicious (cf. 5.50 ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν τοῦ Διός), and cf. Arist. Knights 1311 καθῆσθαί μοι δοκεῖ εἰς τὸ Θης εῖον πλεούσαις ἢ ’πὶ τῶν σεμνῶν θεῶν, and Thesm. 224 (θέὠἐς τὸ τῶν σεμνῶν θεῶν.

6. ἐν τῇ παρόδῳ with καθεζομένους, on the way, while passing from the altar of Athena. It was because they feared they were to be killed that they sought asylum a second time.

7. ἐναγεῖς καὶ ἀλιτήριοι τῆς θεοῦ —cf. Arist. Eq. 445 ἐκ τῶν ἀλιτηρίων σέ φημι γεγονέναι τῆς θεοῦ (Cleon to the Sausage-man). άλιτήριοι were thought dangerous people to live with (cf. Neil ad l.c.), and so the Alcmaeonidae were all banished, and at first for ever, Ath. Pol. i. But they returned, and in 508 a second expulsion took place at the instigation of the opponents of Cleisthenes the Alcmaeonid, who were supported by Cleomenes.

12. στασιαζόντων —the party opposed to Cleisthenes and led by Isagoras. Cleisthenes was almost immediately recalled.

13. τὰ ὀστᾶ ἀνελόντες —so Ath. Pol. i. ἐκ τῶν τάφων ἐξεβλήθησαν, but the incident is there connected with the first expulsion.

17. πρῶτον —first and foremost. δῆθεν shows this is sarcastic.

19. κατὰ τὴν μητέρα —the family tree is as follows:— Megacles, the Archon Alcmaeon Megacles, opponent of Peisistratus Ariphron Cleisthenes ὁ τὴν δημοκρατίαν Agariste m. Xanthippus καταστήσας Pericles Ariphron

20. ῥᾷον < ἄν >—the addition of ἄν is necessary; cf. c. 57. 5. There is no ex. of pres. in fut. sense after νομίζω (Stahl, Q.G. pp. 6 f.).

22. παθει—ν ἂν ... οἴσειν —the aor with ἄν expresses a contingency, the fut. a certainty. The subject of οἴσειν is prob. αὐτό or τὸ πρᾶγμα supplied in sense.

23. ὡς — since.

24. τὸ μέρος — partly; cf. p. 66 l. 9 .

26. ἄγων τὴν πολιτείαν —cf. 2.65 of Pericles τὸ πλῆθος ἦγε. In Ath. Pol. c. 27 τὴν π. ἄγειν εἰς αὑτούς=to get political power into their own hands.

2. τὸ ἀπὸ Τ. ἄγος —the pollution resulting from (the affair of) Mt. Taenarus.

8. σεισμόν —c. 101. 2.

9. Χαλκιοίκου —there was a bronze temple and statue of Athena at Sparta on the Acropolis; hence the name The τέμενος covered a considerable space and contained several buildings.

11. τὸ πρῶτον —for the first time; see c. 95 .

15. Ἑρμιονίδα —of Hermione, in Argolis.

16. ἄνευ —without the orders of; cf. c. 91. 5 . ἰδίᾳ gives, in the positive form, the same sense as ἄνευ Λ.; cf. 1.119.

17. Ἑλληνικόν — national, that against Persia; if the reading is right the object is to make an antithesis with τὰ πρὸς βασιλέα π., but Ἑλληνικὸς π. generally means a war against or ‘between Greeks.’ Many edd. accept Μηδικόν (see crit. note).

19. πράσσειν —inf. of purpose; cf. 6.8. 2 ξυγκατοικίσαι Λεοντίνους. The sense of diplomatic or secret negotiation often underlies πράσσω.

20. Ἑλληνικῆς —to rule Greece.

21. ἀπὸ τοῦδε —referring to what follows. For κατέθετο cf. c. 33. 1.

23. Βυζάντιον —see c. 94. 2 .

τῇ προτέρᾳ π .—dat of time without ἐν is possible, as παρουσία implies time; cf. c. 44, 2.20 , ἐκεἱνῃ τῇ ἐσβολῇ.

26. τότε —at that time, viz. τῇ προτέρᾳ παρουσίᾳ: many edd. following Kruger put τότε inside the parenthesis and take it with ἑάλωσαν, and this seems more likely. τούτων has been conjectured for τούτους: but τούτους refers prob. to βασιλέως προσήκοντες καὶ ξυγγενεῖς, and ἔλαβεν=‘captured,’ not ‘received as his share of the spoil.’

1. τῶν ἄλλων ξ .—the exclusive use of ἄλλος , the rest, i.e. the allies.

2. Γογγύλου —he received from Xerxes certain places in the Troad in reward for his treason, and in the time of Thuc. his descendants still possessed them.

5. αὐτῷ —βασιλεῖ.

9. δορί =μάχῃ, poetical, a remnant of the Ionic in which the original letter was composed.

γνώμην ποιοῦμαι —propose. Stephanus altered ἀποπέμπει above to ἀποπέμπω, but the same change from 3rd to 1st pers. occurs in the terms of the Peace of Antalcidas, Xen. Hell. 5.1.31.

10. τὴν σήν —σήν=‘a daughter of yours’ may be right (sce crit. note).

17. ἥσθη τε καὶ ἀποστέλλει —the co-ordination of historic pres. and aorist is common in Thuc; cf. c. 131. 2.

20. Δασκυλῖτιν —Dascylium in Bithynia was the capital of this province, Φρυγία ἐφ’ Ἑλλησπόντῳ, or κάτω Φρυγία. The Persian empire was divided into twenty satrapies.

22. καί answers τε, so that strictly we should have a second infin., but the constn. of the καί-clause is changed and made independent, as in 3.94. 3; 4.3.3; 5.61. 4.

23. ἀντεπετίθει —charged him with ... in return; Croiset compares Dem. 34.28 τὰς ἐπιστολάς ἃς ἐπεθήκαμεν. The infin. follows as with δίδωμι, as if he had said ἀντεπέστελλε.

24. ἁποδεῖξαι —i.e to show to Pausanias, through the messenger, the great king's seal on the letter.

25. ἑαυτοῦ —βασιλέως.

2. τῶν ἀνδρῶν ... κείσεταί σοι εὐεργεσία —lit. in connexion with the men ... a service is set down to you in the record for ever. τῶν ἀνδρῶν is objective gen; εύεργεσία is the service rendered by Pausanias (not, as Mr. Forbes supposes, due to him). The benefactors of the Great King were recorded in a chronicle, Herod. 8.33. κεῖται is the pass. of κατέθετο, c. 128. 4. Pausanias had established a right to consideration for himself and his descendants.

6. ἀρέσκομαι —not the Ionic use of e. 35. 2.

μήτε νὺξ μήθ’ ἡμέρα —this and χρυσοῦ καὶ ἀργύρου δαπάνῃ are quite in the Persian style: we can hardly doubt that the letter is substantially genuine.

9. κεκωλύσθω —se. ὧν ἐμοὶ ὑπισχνεῖ τι. The 3rd pers. is awkward, and κεκώλυσο has been proposed.

12. κάλλιστα καὶ ἄριστα —cf. Xen. Anab. 3.1.6 ἑπήρετο τίνι ἂν θύων κάλλιστα καὶ ἄριστα ἔλθοι.

19. σκευὰς Μηδικάς —the dress was the κάνδυς, a long robe with long broad sleeves over a short tunic, ἀναξυρίδες, trousers, and τιάρα, head-dress; also bracelets (ψέλια) and necklaces (στρεπτοί).

22. τράπεζάν τε —epulabatur more Persarum luxuriosius, says Nepos (Pausanias 3.2; cf. the Persicos odi apparatus of Horace, The simplicity of the Greek δεῖπνον is notorious.

24. βραχέσι — small.

τῇ γνώμῃ —with ἔμελλε, he meant to.

26. ὀργῇ — temper in neutral sense; cf. c. 122. 1. He made men ‘wait before his doors’ as if he were a satrap.

4. ἀνεκάλεσαν —plup. in sense.

7. ἐκ τοῦ Βυζαντίου —see c. 128. 5.

10. Τρῳάδας —adj.=Τρωικάς; cf. 6.62 Ἑλλὰς πόλις. The use of such forms as adj. is poetical and Ionic.

14. σκυτάλην —a secret message. Plut. Lys. 19 gives a complete description: when a general was sent out from Sparta two sticks of exactly the same size were prepared; the ephors kept one, the officer the other. When the ephors wished to send a secret message, they wrapped a strip of papyrus round their stick spirally and wrote on it. They then sent the papyrus only, and in order to read it, the officer had to wrap it again round the other stick. Both sticks and message were called σκυτάλη .

15. εἰ δὲ μή —c. 28. 3.

16 προαγορεύειν —depending on εἶπον, but in a different relation; cf. c. 26. 5.

20. τὸν βασιλέα —and Pausanias was only the king's guardian.

21. διαπραξάμενος —by some form of negotiation (probably bribery) he was released from prison.

23. περὶ αὐτῶν —i e. τῶν κατηγορημάτων (Schol.): sc. ἐαυτόν. The other reading περὶ αὐτόν is hardly detended by ἐκ τῶν περὶ Παυσανίαν ἐλέγχων c. 135. 2, for the verb is regularly trans.

26. ἄν —with ἐτιμωροῦντο.

4. ἴσος εἶναι τοῖς παροῦσι — to conform to existing conditions, τοῖς ἤθεσι τῶν Αακώνων (Schol.), or better, to the circumstances in which he found himself as a Σπαρτιάτης. (Various alterations of the text have been proposed here, e.g. ε+|ν τοῖς παροῦσι, in his present conduct Croiset—or ἐπὶ τοῖς π. Stein—but there seems to be no very definite objection to it as it stands.)

5. τά τε ἄλλα —the τε=‘both,’ looking as to what follows; so that we have here an explanation of υποψιας ... παροῦσι. (Some edd. insert καί before τά.)

6. ἐξεδεδιῄτητο κτλ .=ἔξω τῶν ... ἐδεδιῄτητο.

7. τὸν τρίποδα —this was a golden tripod suppoited by a bronze stand in the shape of three serpents twisted together (Herod. 9.33). It was dedicated after Plaraea. The gold part was afterwards destroyed by the Phocians in the Sacred War (Pausan. x. xiii. 9), but the stand was removed to Byzantium, and still exists at Constantinople. See Hicks Man. Hist. Inscr. p. 11.

10. τὸ ἐλεγεῖον —this ‘couplet,’ which ‘he dared to have inscribed on his own authority,’ is attributed to Simonides of Ceos. In the Anthology it reads thus:

Ἑλλάνων ἀρχαγὸς ἐπεὶ στρατὸν ὤλεσα Μήδων Ηαυσανίας Φοίβῳ μνᾶμ’ ἀνέθηκα τόδε.

ἀρχηγός was a title of the Spartan kings.

14. εὐθὺς τότε —at the time that the tripod was offered.

17. μέντοι —although the offensive inscription was removed.

ἀδίκημα καὶ τότ’ ἐδόκει εἶναι —(this act) was thought even at that time to be a crime. The subject of ἐδόκει is αὐτό, the act of having the couplet inseribed. τότ’ was first adopted by Classen for τοῦτ’, and καὶ ἐπεί γε δὴ ἐν τούτῳ καθειστήκει requires it as a contrast of time: also there is no point in καὶ τοῦτ’, as no other offence of P. in earlier times has been mentioned to justify καί. Stem inserts τοῦτο after άδίκημα, but this is not necessary.

18. ἐπεί γε δὴ ἐν τούτῳ καθειστήκει —i.e now when he was accused of ‘Medism.’ ὲπεί γε δή is more emphatie than ἐπειδή.

25. οὐδὲ τῶν ... πιστεύσαντες —an explanation of οὐδ’ ὥς.

μηνυταῖς —the technical word for an informer who had not full citizen-rights

27. εἰώθασιν —sc. χρῆσθαι.

4. Ἀργίλιος —he was a slave from the Thracian town Argilus.

5. αὐτοῦ ... ἐκείνῳ —applying to the same person; cf. IV. 73. 4; VI. 61. 7 κατέγνωσαν αὐτοῦ καὶ τῶν μετ’ εκείνου: Audoc. 1, 64 εἶπον αὐτοῖς ... ἐκείνοις δέ: conversely vii. 14 εἰ προσγενήσεται ... πρὸς ἐκείνους χωρῆσαι, διαπεπολεμήσεται αὐτοῖς: Plat. Rep. p. 343 C εὐδαίμονα ἐκεῖνον ποιοῦσιν ὑπηρετοῦντες αὐτῷ .

μηνυτὴς γίγνεται, δείσας ... καὶ παρασημηνάμενος ... λύει —καί joins δείσας to λύει, which should strictly be λύσας: the constn. is thus changed from partic. to finite verb, as 2.47 λεγόμενον μὲν ... οὐ μέντοι ἐμνημονεύετο: vii. 13 τῶν ναυτῶν μὲν ... ἀπολλυμένων, οἰ δὲ θεράποντες ... αὐτομολοῦσι.

Stem reads δς δείσας, but no change is needed. καί does not join γίγνεται to λύει because the clause with λύει is anterion in time to γ. μηνυτής, and such a hysteron proteron is without example in Thuc.

6. κατὰ ἐνθύμησίν τινα =ἐνθυμηθείς , because he noticed.

8. παρασημηνάμενος —counterfeiting; ‘for Thuc. says παρασημηνάμενος τὴν σφραγῖδα in the sense of παρατυπώσασθαι’ Pollux viii. 27. This reading, restored by Hude, is better than παραποιησάμενος, which is probably a gloss on it.

ἢν ψευσθῇ τῆς δόξης —i.e. if his suspicion about the contents of the letter proved false. He could then replace the seal and go on to Artabazus. Did it not occur to him that even in this case he might ‘never return,’ i.e. be put to death?

9. ἢ καὶ ἐκεῖνος —i.e. in case Pausanias should ask for the letter back before the messenger left, in order to alter something in it. If the messenger's suspicion about the letter proved false, he would say nothing, but seal up the letter. But suppose the man's suspicions proved true, why should be not have contemplated an immediate visit to the ephors, without giving Pausanias time to ask for the letter back? In point of fact this is what the man did. (The text is suspected by some edd.—e.g Herwerden and Stenp—but the confusion of the messenger's motives seems to come from Thuc.)

14 ἐπίστευσαν —sc. that the information they had received from the helots was true.

16. ἀπὸ παρασκευῆς —cf. Lysias 13.22 εἰ μὴ ἐκ παρασκευῆς ἐμηνύετο, by collusion, or arrangement, here with the gen. abs.

17. ἐπὶ Ταίναρον —the shrine of Poseidon on Taenarus was sanctuary (asylum).

18. σκηνησαμένου —both σκηνᾶσθαι and σκηνεῖσθαι are elsewhere intrans., but here the sense must be trans.: hence Madvig proposed σκευασαμένου, and one inferior MS. gives σκηνωσαμένου: Stein reads ἐς διπλῆν .

19. τῶν [ τε ]—the τε has no correlative and is no doubt spurious.

23. τά τε ... καὶ τἆλλ’ ἀποφαίνοντος —the position of τε shows that ἀποφαίνοντος is added by an afterthought.

24. ὡς οὐδὲν ... παραβάλοιτο —that he had never hazarded P.'s interests—a gambling term.

26. προτιμηθείη δέ —ironical: this was all the reward he had got. ἐν ἴσῳ =ὁμοίως.

2. πίστιν ... ἀναστάσεως —pledging his word for his departure from the temple, sc. in safety. ( ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ is perhaps a commentator's note on τῆς ἀναστάσεως .)

4. τὰ πρασσόμενα —the negotiations with the king. The sentence here concluded is a remarkable instance of the partiality of Thuc. for the circumstantial participle.

12. δηλώσαντος —sc. what was about to happen. εὐνοίᾳ is dat. of cause.

19. ἔνδον ὄντα —i.e. making sure that he was in the οἴκημα.

21. ἐξεπολιόρκησαν —the terms are taken from the starving out of a city.

22. ὥσπερ εἶχεν —as he was, ‘in his present condition,’ i.e. shut up in the building; cf. e.g. 2.46. (In 6.57. 3 I accepted Krüger's version ‘forthwith’; but I agree with Steup that this is wrong.) If he had ‘expired’ inside, the holy place would have been profaned.

25. τὸν Καιάδαν —the exact site of this ravine called Caeadas is not known: it was in the hills near Sparta. καίατα, crevices produced by earthquake, were so common in Laconia that Sparta is called καιετάεσσα in Homer.

26. οὗπερ τοὺς κακούργους —the Schol. is ἐμβαλεῖν δηλονότι (scilicet). τόπος ὁ Κέαδας ὀρωρυγμένος ἐν Λακωνικῇ, ὅπου τοὺς κακούργους εἰώθασι ῥιπτεῖν. The words of this note have got mixed with the text in the MSS. in several ways, and it is very probable that οὗπερ τοὺς κακούργους is due to the note. (οὗπερ ought to be οἷπερ, but this error—which is common in MSS.— does not count against the genuineness of the words. Volgraff first bracketed them.)

2. οὗπερ —the omitted antecedent is ἐκεῖσε.

3. προτεμενίσματι —ὁ πρὸ ... τοῦ τεμένους τόπος (Schol.) until then unconsecrated.

4. ὅ —i.e. τὸ τὸν τάφον κεῖσθαι ἑν τῷ π.

ὡς κτλ .—accus. abs.

7. ἀνδριάντας —not necessarily statues of Pausanias; but symbolic fignres consecrated to the gods of the upper world.

15. τοῖς αὐτοῖς —i.e. θανάτῳ .

16. ἔτυχε γὰρ ὠστρακισμένος —when this had happened is unknown; 471 B.C. is generally favoured in spite of the statement in Ath. Pol. that Them. was at Athens in 462 B.C.: the year depends upon other events such as the reduction of Naxos (see c. 137. 2)—of which the date is uncertain. For a discussion see Sandys on Ath. Pol. c. 25 .

20. ἄγειν —sc. to Athens.

23. εὐεργέτης —by some official act, probably in some dispute with another state, according to Plutarch with Corinth. In all such decrees of honour conferred on a ξένος a clause giving him ἀσυλία was contained; and on this clause Them. relied.

23. αὐτῶν —the Corcyreans; for this idiom cf. c. 34. 4 .

26. ἀπεχθέσθαι —ἐχθρὸς (leg. ἐχθροὺς)γενέσθαι (Schol.). The MSS. ἀπέχθεσθαι assumes a pres. form ἀπέχθομαι: similarly in vii. 75 ABEFM give αίσθεσθαι as from αίσθομαι, but CG have αἰσθέσθαι: in Eur. Phoen. 300 the MSS. have θίγειν as from θίγὡθιγγάνω). But that these only oceur in forms that may be aorists is very suspicious: with other such double forms—e.g. αὔξω beside αὐξάνω—the indic. forms occur.

28. κατὰ πύστιν ᾗ χ. —in accordance with inquiry as to the road he took. The opt. is iterative.

2. Μολοσσῶν —in Epirus. What the ‘diffieulty’ was that led Them. to one who was ‘no friend of his’ is not explained.

5. καθέζεσθαι —aor. in sense: the mid. form καθίζομαι is not used.

7. οὐκ ἀξιοῖ —asks him not to ...

8. Ἀθηναίων δεομένῳ —Them. must have opposed a request from Admetus for Athenian help.

9. καὶ γὰρ ἂν κτλ. —for at the present time I might be ill-treated by one far weaker than you (ἐκείνου=ἢ ἐκεῖνος, depending on ἀσθενεστέρου); but it is generous (like a gentleman) to take vengeance on equals (not on inferiors) and when equal to them (and not stronger). This curious form of appeal must be the invention of Thuc.; and we may doubt whether it would have moved such a king.

13. χρείας τινός —in reference to, the gen. of separation parallel to ἐς τὸ ς. σῴζεσθαι.

ἐς τὸ σῶμα σῴζεσθαι —lit. with reference to preserving his life, i.e. in a matter of life and death. σῴζεσθαι is mid. Recent edd. take τό with σῴζεσθαι: but it is possible Poppo was right in supposing that in cases like the present the single article does double duty. Cf. Plat. Gorg. p. 489 C μηδενὸς ἄξιοι πλὴν ἴσως τῷ σώματι ἰσχυρίσασθαι. Note that ψυχή below, coriesponding to σῶμα, has the article.

16. ἀποστερῆσαι ἄν —would withhold; this is the proper sense of ἀποστερεῖν, and hence σωτηρίας is required.

18. ὥσπερ καί —the καί marks the connexion of the two acts, ἀνίστησι—ἑκαθέζετο ἔχων αὐτόν =μετ’ αὐτοῦ. Notice the extreme solemnity of supplication by the life of the child.

19. καὶ μέγιστον ἦν ἱ. τοῦτο —parenthetical.

23. ἑτέραν —the Aegean.

24. τὴν Ἀ. —sc. πόλιν. This Alexander was father of Perdiccas (see c. 57). Thuc. calls the town ‘Alexander's’ because it lay south of Macedon proper. Its status caused difficulty at various times, for it never fully acquiesced in Macedonian rule till conquered by Philip the Great.

26. χειμῶνι —the wind was north, and unless the captain tacked would carry the ship right into Naxos.

27. ὃ ἐπολιόρκει Νάξον —the accession of Artaxerxes, who had lately ascended the throne when Them. arrived (see 137.4) took place in 465 B.C. Hence, to make the dates suit, the siege of Naxos was assigned by Schafer to 466 B.C.; but, judging from the narrative of cc. 89-90, this leaves too short an interval between the siege of Naxos and the death of Xerxes; for Eurymedon was fought before the latter event, and yet, apparently, some time after the revolt of Naxos. Hence other modern authorities assign the siege of Naxos to 468, 470 or even 473 B.C. But then the narrative here cannot be correct. In Plut. Them. 25, where this passage is used, some MSS. have Θάσον for Νάξον: and this would suit here better (see c. 100. 2); but there may be a mistake on Thuc.'s part.

4. τὴν δὲ ἀσφάλειαν εἶναι —i.e. ‘his safety depended on.’

5. μέχρι —with μέχρι, μέχρι οὗ and πρίν Thuc. occasionally uses subj. without ἄν according to the older idiom; but ἕως with plain subj. does not occur.

πλοῦς —until fair weather came, in contrast with χειμών above: this and not ‘until he sailed’ seems to be the sense; πλοῦς= εὔπλοια, as also in 3.3 πλῷ χρησάμενος καὶ τριταῖος ἀφικόμενος.

6. ἀπομνήσεσθαι —the ordinary fut. in Attic is μνησθήσομαι, but Herod. uses μνήσομαι.

11. αὐτῷ —for the poetical use of dat. after ἦλθε cf. c. 13. 3. The aor. is plupert. in sense, and ὔστερον means after his flight. At Athens his goods were confiscated so far as they were found, because he was a traitor.

13. κάτω ... ἄνω —as in ἀνά‐βασις and κατά‐βασις.

15. νεωστὶ βασιλεύοντα —for νεωστί with imperf. partic. cf. 3.20 ἀνδρῶν νξωστὶ πόλιν ἐχοντων.

ὅτι —this convenient form of quasi-oblique speech, where the speaker's actual words follow ὅτι, oceurs only in prose.

17. ὑμέτερον —referring of course to the royal family.

18. ἐπιόντα ἐμοί —a fine touch due to self-confidence.

20 ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ μὲν κτλ. —when he retreated (πάλιν belongs to ἀποκομιδή) himself in danger, while I was in safety.

22. γράψας —referring to; cf. c. 87. 2, but here the constn. is κατὰ σύνεσιν after ἐδήλου ἡ γραφή.

τὴν ἐκ Σ. προάγγελσιν τῆς ἀναχωρήσεως —Herod. 8.33 relates that Themistocles sent a inessage to Xerxes saying that he had persuaded the Greeks not to break down the bridges over the Hellespont, and consequently the king might retreat at leisure. The story agrees with Thuc. here, except that Herod, says the message was sent from Audios, not Salamis. The true object of Them. was to cause Xerxes to retreat rapidly, since Xerxes had been once taken in by a false message from Them. (viz. that the Greeks were about to retreat from Salamis, Herod. 8.33) and would be sure to assuine this one also was false. Them. now misrepresents the object he had had in sending the message. (Haacke and others refer τὴν ... ἀναχωρήσεως to the earlier message of Them., viz., that the Greeks were about to withdraw from Salamis. By this message Them. caused the defeat of the king; by the later one he rescued the king. This explanation seems simpler; but it looks as if the parenthesis γράψας ... διάλυσιν refers only to what Them. pretends to have done to serve the king.)

24. ἣν ψευδῶς προσεποιήσατο —Herod. says Them. urged the Gk. fleet to break down the bridges, but he was opposed by the Peloponnesians The Athenian fleet was then willing to go alone, but this Them. successfully opposed. It looks as if Thuc. did not believe in this last part of the story. (Croiset understands ‘which he misrepresented,’ others avoid the appearance of an mconsistency with Herod.)

25. οὐ διάλυσιν —cf. e.g. iii. 95. 2 τὴν οὐ περιτείχισιν: vii. 34 τὴν τῶν Κορινθίων οὐκέτι ἐπαναγωγήν.

27. τὴν σὴν φιλίαν —my friendship for you.

4. ὅν —duration of time.

10. τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ —about the Greeks, but in sense this is object of δουλώσειν .

12. πεῖραν διδούς —so πεῖραν λαμβάνω.

13. ἦν γὰρ ... δηλώσας καὶ ... ἄξιος —the aor. partic. with ἧν is here joined to an adj. with ἦν: the consin. is nunsual, and some edd. place βεβαιότατα ... δηλώσας between commas, taking καί as emphasising διαφερόντως τι. Transl. ‘Them. was in fact one who showed most convincingly natural powers, and he was beyond all others worthy of the very highest admiration in this respect.’ ἐς αὐτό refers to φύσεως ἰσχύν: διαφερόντως τι belongs to θαυμάσαι: for μᾶλλον ἑτέρου cf. c. 84. 2 ἧσσον ἑτέρων.

14. φύσεως ἰσχύν —Thuc. evidently holds with the old view, as against the sophists, that φύσις is superior to μάθησις.

15. ἐς αὐτό —ἐς τὸ ξυνετὸν φαίνεσθαι.

16. οὔτε προμαθὼν ... οὔτ’ ἐπιμαθών —not aiding it (τὴν ξύνεσιν) by any knowledge acquired before or after, i.e. either by learning or by experience. (What time is alluded to in the προ‐ and ἐπι-? Some say his entry into public life, others, much better, the time when he gave any advice derived from this ξύνεσις—but interpret, ‘his opinion was not based on previous knowledge, nor, after giving it, had he to modify it because he found he was wrong.’ Neither verb occurs elsewhere in Thuc. Croiset sees an allusion to Prometheus and Epimetheus.)

18. δῑ ἐλαχίστης βουλῆς —with the least consideration.

19. ἐπὶ πλεῖστον τοῦ γενησομένου —those edd. who connect these words understand to the remotest future, so that ἐπὶ πλεῖστον refers to time: the objection lies in the sing. τοῦ γενησομένου after the plur. μελλόντων, and so some think it spurious, others join τοῦ γενησομένου to τῶν μελλόντων, which is very forced. But all difficulty disappears if we understand by τὸ γενησόμενον the particular event that was going to happen and take ἐπὶ πλεῖστον of extent, as in ἐπὶ πλεῖστον ἀνθρώπων in c. 1. 2, so that the whole phrase emphasises only the extraordinary accuracy of his εἰκασία: ‘his forecasts of the future were the best, in every event proving more accurate than those of others.’ ἐπὶ π. τοῦ γεν. is lit. so as to cover the greatest part (i.e. a greater part than any one else) of just that which was coming.

20 μετὰ χεῖρας ἔχοι —so Aeschin. 1.70 ἂ νυνὶ μετὰ χ. ἔχετε: = μεταχειρίζοιτο .

21. ἐξηγήσασθαι —expound his views on it.

ὧν δ’ ἄπειρος εἴη in contrast with ἃ μετὰ χεῖρας ἔχοι=‘that which he took no personal share in.’

22. οὐκ ἀπήλλακτο —he did not fail to, ‘was not without the power’; in later prose we should have τοῦ.—Them. lived before the days of developed oratory.

23. τό τε ἄμεινον ἢ χεῖρον —the advantage or disadvantage of any proposed step.

24. τὸ ξύμπαν εἰπεῖν —parenthetical inf., τό belonging to ξύμπαν.

25. μελέτης δὲ βραχύτητι —with the shortest preparation, a second way in which he showed his power of hitting on the right thing in a minute. The two phiases are not really quite parallel.

28. φαρμάκῳ —the story was that be drank bull's blood: Thuc. evidently thinks it a foolish tale, Aristoph. Eq. 83 .

4. ἄρτον ... οἷνον ... ὄψον —according to a Persian custom: cf. Plat. Alc. i. p. 123 B ‘he said (the person meant is perhaps Xenophon) he passed a district which the inhabitants called ζωνὴν τῆς βασιλέως γυναικός: and another called “the mirror” ... καὶ ὀνόματ’ ἔχειν ἑκάστους τῶν τόπων ἀπὸ ἑκάστου τῶν κόσμων.’ Lampsacns and Myus belonged to the Delian League, so Them. cannot have actually enjoyed their revenues.

8. οἱ προσήκοντες —Cleophantus, a son of Them., lived at Athens. In later times the grave of Them. was located at the entry to Piraeus.

21 προύλεγον ... μή —in the terms of an ultimatum it is not surprising to see μή where οὐ would be ordinarily used: προλέγω contains a meaning of advice or warning. For the Megarian decree and Aegina see c. 67.

27. ἐπεργασίαν —ἐπι‐ denotes encroachment, as in ἐπινέμομαι .

τῆς ἱερᾶς —he means the land between Megara and Attiea consecrated to the Eleusinian goddesses (Schol.).

28. τῆς ἀορίστου —as Mr. Forbes says, this seems to be distinct from τῆς ἱερᾶας, and may mean an undefined or neutral strip of land.

ἀνδραπόδων ὑποδοχήν —this matter is parodied by Aristoph. in Acharn. 325 f.: runaway slaves from Attica found a refuge in Megara.

6. ποιήσαντες —having called through the officials.

7. γνώμας σφίσιν αὐτοῖς προυτίθεσαν —opened a debate, a technical phrase applying properly to the president of the ecclesia (ἐπιστάτης), who allowed the discussion.

10. ἐπ’ ἀμφότερα γιγνόμενοι —ranging themselves on both sides, i.e some taking the one view, some the other.

11. ὡς ( χρὴ ) μὴ ἐ —generally ἐμπόδιος takes dat. of person.

14. λέγειν τε καὶ π. δ —this explains πρῶτος, and always denotes eapacity for public affairs.

19 ὀργῆ — spirit, their ardour cools when they have to carry out their resolution.

21. τὰς ξυμφοράς =τὰ συμβαίνοντα, events; so below.

τρεπομένους —passive.

22. ὁμοῖα καὶ παραπλήσια —these occur together several times, without substantial coherence of sense.

24. τοῖς κ. δόξασιν —fut. perf. in sense=ἃ ἂν δόξῃ.

27. τὰς ξυμφορὰς τῶν π. —the issues of things (lit. “events following from affairs”) can be as incomprehensible in their course as man's thoughts, so that failure is no proof that a resolution was wrong.

29. ὅσα ἄν —whenever anything=(ἐν πᾶσιν)ὄσα ἄν .

3. εἱρημένον —in the thirty years peace.

δίκας διδόναι καὶ δ. —cf. c. 28. 2. The best MSS. give διαφορῶν from διαφορά: the parallel passages, as cc. 56. 1 and 78. 4 favour διαφόρων from διάφορος, but cf. cc. 23. 5, 146.

8. διαλύεσθαι —middle.

12 τελευταῖοι —pred. with ἥκοντες.

15. περὶ βραχέος —about a trifle; cf. c. 78. 1 .

16. ὅπερ —accus. de quo, becoming the subject of καθαιρεθείη. προύχονται=προφασίζονται.

18. ὑπολίπησθε —after the war has begun.

20. ἔχει — involves: ὑμῶν depends on γνώμης: ‘the confirmation and trial of your resolution’ are explained in chiastic order by the two clauses that follow.

21. οἷς —masc.=ἑκείνοις γάρ.

24 σαφὲς ἂν κ. —make it clear to them that they must deal with you on an equal footing rather than as superiors.

28. καὶ ἐπὶ μεγάλῃ καὶ ἐ β. π. —be the reason great or small for yielding. The constn. changes from infin. ὑπακούειν to partic. εἴξοντες ... ἔξοντες, with the intention of not. It would be more usual, but it can hardly be necessary, to have ὡς after προφάσει.

3. ἀπὸ τῶν ὁμοίων —masc.

4. πρὸ δίκης — before, meaning instead of proceeding by arbitration. Cf. Dem. 23.28 ἃν ἀφέληταί τις ... μὴ βουλόμενος πρὸ δίκης έκδοῦναι.

τοῖς πέλας —cf. c. 32. 1.

5. τὰ δὲ τοῦ πολέμου κτλ. —object of ἀκούοντες, but its position gives it the effect of an accus of respect.

8. αὐτουργοί —δῑ ἑαυτῶν τὴν γῆν ἐργαζόμενοι σπάνει δούλων (Schol.).

11. βραχέως —only for a short time. The object of ἐπιφέρειν is πολέμους .

13. ναῦς πληροῦντες =ναῦς ἃς πληροῦσιν. Several edd. accept the conjecture πληροῦν, which is very probable. In Plat. Gorg. p. 494 C πληρούντα is probably a corruption of πληροῦν. Apart from the awkward constn. here there seems to be no point in πληροῦντες .

15. ἀπόντες —the three particc. are causal, and the full meaning is ‘since to do that (ναῦς ... ἐκπέμπειν) involves to them (1) absence from their lands’—(cf. the opposite ἐπὶ τῶν ἰδίων εἶναι Ath. Pol. c. 15), (2) paying the expenses out of their own money instead of getting it from the state, and (3) being chased off the seas by the Athenians.

16. αἱ δὲ περιουσίαι —this sentence has direct reference to the finaneral condition of Athens. The policy of Pericles was to accumulate a reserve, so that the εἰσφορά—war-tax on property—was seldom levied; but the Pel. would depend on such a tax; see c. 121. 4. βίαιοι (like βέβαιος always of two termins. in Thuc.) is a descriptive epithet to εἰσφοραί in general: they are not free gifts (ἐπιδόσεις ).

18. σώμασι —cf. c. 121. 3.

20. τὸ μὲν κτλ .—τὸ μὲν ... τὸ δέ apply to σώμασι ... χρήμασι, πιστόν and βέβαιον being pred.: lit. having in the one a possession they can rely on—viz. that it may come safe out of the dangers; but in the other a belonging for which they have no security that they will not spend it before the war ceases.

26. μὴ πρὸς ὁμοίαν ἀ. — ‘against a power differing in character’ from theirs. The μή under the influence of the infin.

ὅταν —so long as; cf. c. 142. 1 .

1. οὐχ ὁμόφυλοι —not all Dorians: of course the Athenian allies were not ὁμόφυλοι (2.9. 4), but they were all under the guidance of Athens.

τὸ ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν ἕ. σπεύδῃ —the verb attracted to ἕκαστος: τὸ ἐφ( ἑ., what concerns himself is object of σπεύδῃ. But generally τὸ ἐπί and accus. (1) is adverbial, (2) means as far as concerns, or ‘depends on.’

2. μηδέν belongs to the inf.

5. ἐν βραχεῖ μὲν μορίῳ —sc. of the whole time spent in the meeting. ἐν extends over τῷ πλέονι.

7. παρά —owing to; this use is common in Demosth., and cf. Aeschines 2.80 παρὰ τοῦτο διαφθαρῆναι, ὅτι ...: 3.80 παρὰ τοῦτο οὐκ ἦλθεν, ὅτι ...

8. βλάψειν —sc. τὰ κοινά.

9. ὑπέρ —in place of.

12. μέγιστον =ὃ μέγιστόν ἐστι.

15. μενετοί —act.; Aeschin. 3.163 ῥητορικήν δειλίαν δημόσιος καιρὸς οὐκ ἀναμένει: Dem. 4.37 αἱ τῶν πραγμάτων οὐ μένουσι καιροὶ τὴν ἡμετέραν βραδυτῆτα.

17. τὴν μὲν γὰρ κτλ. —this is taken in two ways: (1) τὴν μέν object of παρασκευάσασθαι and πόλιν ἀντίπαλον in apposition= ὥστε γενέσθαι πόλιν ἀντίπαλον (Krüger etc.); (2) τὴν μέν accus. of respect, ‘as regards the one’ (Shilleto, Classen, etc.). The sense is clearly given by Arnold: ‘Pericles is distinguishing between two different methods of ἐπιτείχισις, the one by founding a city in the neighbourhood of Athens strong enough to interfere with her trade and be a check on her power, πόλιν ἀντίπαλον: the other by merely raising one or two forts in Attica, as strongholds for plundering parties to keep the country in constant annoyance and alarm, φρούριον.’ The only difficulty is that ἐπιτείχισις is nowhere found of a rival city founded in time of peace; hence (2) is probably the constn. intended.

18. ἦ που δή —of course, then, sc χαλεπόν ἐστι .

19. ἐκείνοις ἡμῶν ἀντεπιτετειχισμένων —this seems to refer to the certainty that Athens would reply to an ἐπιτείχισις by taking similar measures in Peloponnesian territory (Pylus, Cythera): hence we look for a future; and ἀντεπιτειχιουμένων, ἀντεπιτετειχισομένων or the insertion of ἄν has been proposed. Another view is that Athens herself is meant; she is already standing as an ἐπιτείχισις threatening any post that Sparta might establish in Attica. Since an ἐπιτείχισις always occurs in an enemy's country, this could only be justified by supposing that Pericles uses the term loosely for the sake of the antithesis. But it certainly looks as if something to be done by Athens is meant.

22. αὐτομολίαις —by encouraging the slaves in Attica to desert to them. This actually happened in the case of Decelea in after years.

25. πλέον γὰρ ἔχομεν κτλ .—ἐμπειρίας depends on πλέον ἔχομεν, we have more experience of land operations through our naval experience than they have in naval operations from their service on land. Pericles alludes to the use of Athenian fleets on hostile coasts in connexion with descents on the land ( ἀποβάσεις). The knowledge of the Pel. coast-line would enable them to choose the right point for an ἐπιτείχισις.

28. τὸ δέ —the δέ answers the μέν of 142.3.

2. αὐτό —τὸ ναυτικόν.

6. ἐφορμεῖσθαι —being blockaded.

9. ἐν τῷ μὴ μελετῶντι —ἐν=‘owing to,’ as often; for the neut. partic. with art. as subst. cf. τὸ δεδιὸς αὐτοῦ c. 36. 1.

13. ὅταν τύχῃ —as occasion arises, i.e. casually.

ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον —sc. δεῖ.

15. κινήσαντες —cf. c. 93. 2 .

19. ἐσβάντων —in case we embark. The two highest classes of citizens—ἰππεῖς and πεντακοσιομέδιμνοι—served on board only on occasions of great danger. The citizen crews consisted ordinarily of ζευγῖται and θῆτες.

20. τόδε —i.e. τὸ ἀντιπάλους εἶναι κτλ.

21. κυβερνήτας —pred.

22. ὑπηρεσίαν — crews, collective, hence the plur. in agreement.

24. τήν τε αὑτοῦ —he would not again be able to set foot in his own city since it was part of the Atheman empire.

26. ἕνεκα governs δόσεως: ὀλίγων ἡμερῶν depends on μισθοῦ. Pericles assumes that the Pel. fleet would not be able to keep the sea for any considerable time.

3. οὐκ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου μεγάλα —lit. other important things (μεγάλα) on a greater scale, i.e. ‘have the advantage of them in other important matters.’ This refers back to what has preceded, and is not further explained, for Thuc. does not here want to give a detailed account of the Athenian position: this is done in the second book. The ref., as Steup says, is especially to the fleet.

6. οὐκέτι ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου —then it will turn out that it is much worse.

13. ὅτι ἐγγύτατα τούτου —i.e. putting ourselves in thought as nearly as possible in the position of islanders.

14. οἰκίας —those outside Athens. During the invasions the population of Attica had to crowd into the city, as Athens could not bring into the field an army strong enough to oppose the Pel. invading force.

17. ὀργισθέντας —we must not let our indignation at our losses drive us into a decisive action with a superior enemy.

20. προσαπόλλυται —for the pres. in fut. sense cf. c. 121. 4 ἁλίσκονται.

ἡσυχάσουσι —sc. οἱ ξύμμαχοι: they will join the enemy.

25. κτῶνται — gain, meaning with ἄνδρας produce.

1. ἐς ἐλπίδα —ἐς is properly ‘bearing on,’ ‘tending to,’ as in λέγειν τι εἰς τὸ πρᾶγμα (Dem. 57.7) etc.

2. ἢν ἐθέλητε —all this is prophetic, if, as is almost certain, it was really said by Pericles and not put into his mouth by Thuc. after the event.

7. ἐκεῖνα μέν —i.e. advice as to the conduct of the war, which is best given during the war itself. For the present (νῦν δέ) our course is clear.

11. ξενηλασίας —these expulsions took place from time to time, no doubt by order of the ephors. Plato suggests ironically that the Spartans used them when they wanted privacy for the study of philosophy; Xenophon says they feared corruption of the traditional character by contact with ξένοι. ποιῶσι , of course, ‘enact’ in their laws.

12. οὔτε γὰρ ἐκεῖνο κωλύει —οὐ κωλύει there is no hindrance to stands for οὐδὲν κωλύει in Aristoph. Av. 463, and in two or three passages from later authors. Hence there is probably no need to insert οὐδέν here. ἐκεῖνο ... τόδε =the ξενηλασίαι and Μεγαρέων ψήφισμα—there is as little to forbid the one as the other in the thirty years' truce.

16. σφίσιν ἐπιτηδείως —see c. 19; alluding to the form of constitution. The Schol. says he thinks τοῖς Λ. is a gloss on σφίσι.

18. αὐτοῖς ἑκάστοις —sc. ἐπιτηδείως.

20. ἄρξομεν, ἀρχομένους —we will not be the first to fight, but if they enter on a war, we will retaliate. The difference between ἄρχω and ἄρχομαι is not important to the sense, but it has a rhetorical effect.

2. γνώμῃ — insight: frequently contrasted with τύχη .

4. ἐς τάδε προήγαγον αὐτά —brought our empire to this; repeated almost in the same words by Alcibiades in 6.18.

ὧν =τῶν πατέρων.

13. τὸ ξύμπαν —in contrast with καθ’ ἕκαστα ὡς ἔφρασε.

15. ἐπὶ ἴσῃ καὶ ὁμοίᾳ —c 27. 1 .

17. αἰτίαι δέ —taking up c. 23. 5.

22. ἀκηρύκτως —there could be no communication without a herald after war had begun. At ἀκηρύκτως, with which strictly the sentence should end, Thuc. suddenly adds a qualification.